NISSAN 2023 VERSA Owner's Manual

Owner's Manual for NISSAN models including: 2023 VERSA, VERSA

OWNER'S MANUAL AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

nissan, versa, 2023, owner manual, owner guide, owner’s manual, pdf, vehicle manual, service, maintenance, scheduled maintenance

nissan;, versa;, 2023;, owner, manual;, owner, guide;, owner’s, manual;, pdf;, vehicle, manual;, service;, maintenance;, scheduled, maintenance

2023 Nissan Versa owners manual - OwnersMan

File Info : application/pdf, 516 Pages, 5.73MB

✖

PDF 2023-Nissan-Versa

2023 VERSA
OWNER'S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

FOREWORD

READ FIRST--THEN DRIVE SAFELY

This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, and clarify your rights under your state's lemon law.
When you require any service or have any questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings, cautions and instructions con-

cerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS!
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers!
· NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
· ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions.
· ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you.
· ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat.
· ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.
· ALWAYS review this Owner's Manual for important safety information.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or engine reprogramming, may cause interference or damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this manual to provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and any updates can also be found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website at https://owners.nissanusa.com/ nowners/navigation/manualsGuide.

If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner's Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For contact information, refer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner's Manual.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

APD1005
If you see this symbol, it means "Do not do this" or "Do not let this happen."

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: "Perchlorate Material special handling may apply. For additional information, refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate/".
BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Panasonic.

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.

© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner's Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service

needs.

However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask You can write to NISSAN with the informa-

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or for the following information:

tion at:

you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

Your name, address, and telephone number
Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the

For U.S. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003

For U.S. customers

driver's side)

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261)

Date of purchase Current odometer reading

or via e-mail at: nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122

Your NISSAN dealer's name Your comments or questions OR

For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN SOFTWARE LICENSE
· Your vehicle includes physical parts and/or physical components of such parts on which software and/or firmware ("Software") is embedded or installed. Additionally, updates to Software may be made available by NISSAN for download and installation by owners from time to time as determined by NISSAN in its sole discretion. Such Software, and all updates thereto, including updates delivered by NISSAN to your vehicle over the air (collectively "Updates"), are licensed, and not sold, to you. A portion of the Software may contain or consist of open source software, which may be used under the terms and conditions of the specific license under which the open source software is distributed. For other Software, including Software for which there is no separate license agreement between you and the manufacturer or owner of the Software, the terms and conditions governing your right to use and the use of the installed Software, including any Updates, applications, services, and content provided for or through the Software, are set forth in the End User License Agreement found at https://www.nissanusa.com/owners/ownership. Your use of the Software, including any Updates, constitutes consent to the End User License Agreement's terms and conditions.
· PLEASE NOTE: The End User License Agreement contains an arbitration clause. You may opt out of this arbitration clause within 30 days of the date of your vehicle purchase by sending a signed, written notice to NISSAN at the following address:
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003
· Please refer to "Updating system software" in the 5. Information section or "Software Update" in the 2. Getting Started section of the NissanConnect® Owner's Manual for information about installing Over-the-Air Updates. For questions or assistance concerning installation of any over-the-air Update, you may contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs at 1-800-333-0207. You may also choose to visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance - charges may apply.

Table of

Illustrated table of contents

contents

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8 Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS

5. Supplemental air bag modules (P. 1-41) 6. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-41) 7. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-57) 8. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (P. 1-21) 9. Rear outboard seat belts (P. 1-9) 10. Rear outboard seat-mounted side-
impact supplemental air bags (P. 1-57) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

1. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-5) 2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-57)

LII2597
3. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-9, 1-15)
4. Seat (P. 1-2)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT

6. Mirrors (P. 3-29) 7. Tire pressure (P. 8-27)
Flat tire (P. 6-3) Tire chains (P. 8-36) 8. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-45) Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system
(if so equipped) (P. 2-50) LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system (if so equipped) (P. 2-50) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24) 9. Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-52) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

1. Engine hood (P. 3-22) 2. Windshield (P. 8-17) 3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-43) 4. Power windows (P. 2-67)

LII2598
5. Door locks (P. 3-4) NISSAN Intelligent Key® system (if so equipped) (P. 3-7) Keys (P. 3-2)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR

7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24) 8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-25) Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2) 9. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-7) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-44) 2. High mounted stop light (P. 8-24) 3. Trunk opener switch (P. 3-22)
0-4 Illustrated table of contents

4. License plate lights (P. 8-24) 5. Rearview camera (P. 4-8) 6. Parking sensor(s) (P. 5-122)

LII2593

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

1. Interior light (P. 2-70) 2. Sun visors (P. 3-28) 3. Map light (P. 2-70)

4. Rearview mirror (P. 3-29) 5. Glove box (P. 2-65) 6. Parking brake (P. 5-25)

LII2658

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Vents (P. 4-16) 2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/
turn signal switch (P. 2-45, 2-52)
0-6 Illustrated table of contents

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-12)

Trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-10)

Vehicle information display (if so

equipped) (P. 2-25)

5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-43)

6. Center display controls (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2, 4-7, 4-27)

Audio controls (P. 4-2, 4-7, 4-27)

7. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-51)

Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

8. Center display (P. 4-2, 4-7, 4-27)

9. Passenger's supplemental air bag

(P. 1-41)

10. Front passenger's supplemental knee

airbag (P. 1-59)

11. Glove box (P. 2-65)

12. Climate controls (P. 4-16, 4-24)

Heated seat switches (if so equipped)

(P. 2-52)

13. Shift lever (P. 5-20)

14. Push-button ignition switch (if so

equipped) (P. 5-13)

15. Wireless charger and indicator (if so

equipped) (P. 2-59)

LII2852 16. Power outlet (P. 2-62)

3. Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-41) Horn (P. 2-52)

USB connection port (P. 4-2, 4-36) AUX jack (if so equipped) (P. 4-2, 4-39)

17. Cruise control switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-51) Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-53) Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (P. 4-2, 4-50)
18. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-59)
19. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel lock lever (P. 3-27)
20. Hood release (P. 3-22) Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-25)
21. Steering wheel switches for audio control (P. 4-2, 4-45) Control panel and vehicle information display switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-25)
22. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-55) Enter/select switch for trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-10) Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection OFF switch (if so equipped) (P 2-54) Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P 2-55) Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch (if so equipped) (P 2-53)

* Refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS
0-8 Illustrated table of contents

1.6L 4 cylinder (HR16DE engine model) 1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4) 2. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-10) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6) 4. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
reservoir (P. 8-9) 5. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-19) 6. Battery (P. 8-12) 7. Fuse box (P. 8-19) 8. Air cleaner (P. 8-16) 9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6) 10. Drive belt location (P. 8-14) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. NOTE: Your vehicle may not be equipped with an engine cover.
LDI3658

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning/ Indicator light (red)
or

Name
Brake warning light

Page 2-14

Charge warning

2-14

light

Door open

2-15

warning light

(if so equipped)

Engine oil

2-15

pressure warning

light

High temperature 2-15 warning light (red) (if so equipped)

Warning/ Indicator light (red)

Name
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Page 2-15

Master warning

2-16

light (if so

equipped)

Rear seat belt

2-16

warning light

and chime (if so

equipped)

Seat belt warning 2-17 light and chime

Security indicator 2-17 light

Supplemental air 2-17 bag warning light

Warning/ Indicator
light (yellow)
or

Name
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

Page 2-17

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) indicator light (if so equipped)

2-18 2-18

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Warning/ Indicator
light (yellow)

Name
Engine start operation indicator light (if so equipped) Front passenger air bag status light

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light

Low fuel warning light (if so equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light

Page 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18

Warning/ Indicator
light (yellow)

Name
Low windshieldwasher fluid warning light (if so equipped) Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Page 2-20 2-20

Master warning

2-21

light (if so

equipped)

NISSAN Intelligent 2-21 Key® warning light (if so equipped)

Power steering

2-21

warning light

Warning/ Indicator
light (yellow)

Name
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning light Shift P (Park) warning light (if so equipped)

Page 2-22 2-22

Slip indicator light 2-22

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

2-22

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Warning/ Indicator
light (other)

Name
CRUISE indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
High Beam Assist indicator light (green)

High beam indicator light (blue)

Page 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

2-23

Warning/ Indicator
light (other)

Name
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (green) (if so equipped) SET indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

Page 2-21 2-24

Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

2-24

SPORT mode indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

2-24

Turn signal/ hazard indicator lights (green)

2-24

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

MEMO
0-12 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Folding rear seat (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Adjustable head restraint/headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Seat belt warning light and chime . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Injured persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . .1-41 Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . .1-61 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . 1-62

SEATS

WARNING
· Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

ARS1152
· For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-9).
· After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

· Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
· Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle.

1-2 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

· The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section.

LRS2795
Forward and backward
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

LRS2814
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-9). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking brake fully applied.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

LRS3254
Seat lifter (driver's seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved.

LRS3247
FOLDING REAR SEAT (if so equipped)
1. Pull up OA to fold each seatback down.

LRS3281
2. To return the rear seat to a seating position, lift up on the seatback and push it up to an upright position. Firmly press
zones OA and OB to lock the seatback in
place.
WARNING
· Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.

1-4 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

· Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
· When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
· Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the hatch where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and hatch securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.

WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/ headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest stalks or remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat if the head restraint/ headrest has been removed. If the head restraint/headrest was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints/ headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

LRS3317
The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints/headrests.
Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint.
Indicates the seating position is equipped with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

· Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
· Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock them in a desired adjustment position.
· The non-adjustable head restraints/ headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.
· Proper Adjustment: For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.
· If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2300
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

LRS2299
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Single notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

1-6 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

REMOVE

LRS2302

Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat.

INSTALL

LRS2303

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint/headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the
notch (notches) O1 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob O2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

WRS0134
ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center is level with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.

LRS2351
For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2305
Raise
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

1-8 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELTS

LRS2306
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

SSS0136
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

WARNING
· Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint.

SSS0134

SSS0016
WARNING
· The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

1-10 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0014
WARNING
· Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
· Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

· Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.
· Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.
· Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.
· Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts.
· If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

· Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
· All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

LRS0786
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT AND CHIME
The driver and front passenger seat is equipped with an enhanced seat belt reminder function. If your vehicle is equipped with an enhanced seat belt reminder function, a visual and audible alert will operate if a driver or front passenger seat belt is unbuckled at speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more under the following conditions:
· If the driver seat belt is not fastened.

· The front passenger's seat belt is not fastened and the seat is occupied by a passenger for 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
· The front passenger's seat belt is not fastened and objects or external force on the passenger seat change the seat belt reminder classification to Occupied.
The seat belt warning light will flash under the conditions shown above until the necessary seat belt is securely fastened.
A warning chime will sound for approximately 90 seconds or until one of the following conditions is met:
· The unbuckled front occupant's seat belt is securely fastened.
· The seat belt reminder function in the front passenger seat no longer detects that the front passenger seat is occupied.
· The ignition is turned off.
The below situations could result in the seat belt reminder light being illuminated and the chime sounding, even with no occupant present in the passenger seat:
· Heavy objects placed on the seat.
· Someone pushing or pulling on the front passenger seat.

· An object placed under the front passenger seat.
· An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
· An object hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
· A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
NOTE:
The rear seats may be equipped with a seat belt warning message in the vehicle information display.
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25 ).
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

1-12 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
· Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint.
· Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
· For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

· Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child's neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, see "Seats" (P. 1-2).

LRS3087
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle
OA until you hear and feel the latch
engage.
· The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.
· If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

LRS2675
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
snug on the hips OB as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack OC . Be
sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions' three-point seat belts have two modes of operation: · Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) · Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-19).
The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, see "Supplemental air bag warning light" (P. 1-62).

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

1-14 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
on the buckle O1 . The seat belt automati-
cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods:
· When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor
· When the vehicle slows down rapidly
To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:
· Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service or to learn more about seat belt operation.

LRS0242
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-9). To adjust, pull out
the adjustment button O1 and move the
shoulder belt anchor to the desired posi-
tion O2 , so the belt passes over the center
of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

WARNING
· After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.
· The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/ shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available for purchase. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.
WARNING
· Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.
· Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.
· Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
· To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.
· If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
· Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

1-16 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CHILD SAFETY

WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child's neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
· Rear-facing child restraints
· Forward-facing child restraints
· Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child's size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forwardfacing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle's seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-19).
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-19).
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. For additional information, see "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" (P. 1-41).

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forwardfacing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen.
A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle

seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck and the lap belt can be positioned properly across the lower hips or upper thighs, use the seat belt without the booster seat.
A booster seat should be used until the child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
· Are the child's back and hips against the vehicle seatback?
· Is the child able to sit without slouching?
· Do the child's knees bend easily over the front edge of the seat with feet flat on the floor?
· Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?
· Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?
· Will the child be able to stay in position for the entire ride?

1-18 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CHILD RESTRAINTS
WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

LRS2690
If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt.
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

ARS1098

WARNING
· Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

WRS0256
The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
Infants and children should never be held on anyone's lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision.
Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger.

NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, see "Forwardfacing child restraint installation using the seat belts" (P. 1-32).
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.
Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child

restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts, or other items. A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat. Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint. Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle. · When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint.

1-20 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, see "LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system" (P. 1-21).
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:
· Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
· Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.

· If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child's height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures.
· If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH anchors or the seat belt to install the child restraint (not both at the same time).
· If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint.
· Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forwardfacing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

LRS3341
LATCH system lower anchor locations
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint unless the combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
The LATCH anchor points can be used to install child restraints in either the rear outboard seating positions or in the center rear seating position. Please refer to the following section of this Owner's Manual for specific information about installing a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH anchors.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision: Only attach LATCH system compat-
ible child restraints to the Lower Anchors shown in the illustration.

For additional information, refer to the following sections of this Owner's Manual for installation guidance.
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

LRS3036
LATCH lower anchor location
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as shown. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.

1-22 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

(These are sometimes referred to as "shared anchors" or "borrowed anchors.")
CRS with rigid lower attachments cannot be installed in the center seat. This type of CRS should only be installed in the outboard seating positions.

LRS3342
LATCH in the center rear seating position
There are no LATCH anchors dedicated to the center rear seating position. However, the inboard LATCH anchors belonging to the two outboard seating positions (indicated by the arrows) can be used together to secure a CRS in the center rear seating position. These anchors are separated by a
distance OA of 14 in (377 mm). Before at-
tempting to secure a CRS in this seating position, ensure that the CRS manufacturer's instructions permit the use of LATCH anchors with the spacing indicated above.

WARNING
Never attach two CRS attachments to the same LATCH anchor. This may overload the anchor in a collision, which could increase the risk of the occupant's serious injury or death.
When installing the CRS in the center rear seating position with the inboard LATCH anchors, be careful to ensure any occupant or CRS in the outboard seating positions is properly restrained using the vehicle seat belt and there is no interference with the center CRS installation. If the outboard occupants cannot be properly restrained, consider using the vehicle seat belt to restrain the CRS in the center seating position, or moving the CRS to another position instead.

LRS0661
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

LRS0662
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.

LRS3313
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located on the rear par-
cel shelf O1 .
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in "Child safety" (P. 1-17) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-19) before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

1-24 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2997
Rear-facing webbing-mounted step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

LRS2996
Rear-facing rigid-mounted step 2

LRS0673
Rear-facing step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats:

LRS0674
Rear-facing step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.

WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision.
For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in "Child safety" (P. 1-17) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-19) before installing a child restraint.

1-26 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0256
Rear-facing step 1
1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

WRS0761
Rear-facing step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.

LRS2395
Rear-facing step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

LRS2396
Rear-facing step 4 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0762
Rear-facing step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

LRS2397
Rear-facing step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-28 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in "Child safety" (P. 1-17) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-19) before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

LRS2995
Forward-facing webbing-mounted step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

LRS2994
Forward-facing rigid-mounted step 2
If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional information, see "Installing top tether strap" (P. 1-31).
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, see "Head restraints/headrests" (P. 1-5).
If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

LRS0671
Forward-facing step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

WRS0697
Forward-facing step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.

1-30 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.

Rear bench seat
Installing top tether strap

LRS3310

1 Top tether strap

2 Anchor point

The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors.

Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Position the top tether strap O1 over the
seatback.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-
chor point O2 as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1. Position the top tether strap O1 over the
seatback.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-
chor point O2 as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-51).

1-32 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0699
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) step 1
For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in "Child safety" (P. 1-17) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-19) before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, see "Head restraints/headrests" (P. 1-5). for head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.
WRS0680
Forward-facing step 3 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, see "Installing top tether strap" (P. 1-36 ).
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

LRS0667
Forward-facing step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS0668
Forward-facing step 5 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

1-34 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.

WRS0681
Forward-facing step 6 6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

WRS0698
Forward-facing step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

LRS3091
Forward-facing step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-51). Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

Rear bench seat
Installing top tether strap

LRS3310

1 Top tether strap

2 Anchor point

The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

1-36 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:
Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child's face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach.
Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child's arm.
A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/ shoulder belt.

A. Low back booster seat B. High back booster seat

LRS2479

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.
Booster seat installation

LRS0453
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
· Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
· Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.

LRS0464
· Make sure the child's head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child's ears. For example, if a low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child's ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child's ears, a high back booster seat should be used.
· If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures.

WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in "Child safety" (P. 1-17) "Child restraints" (P. 1-19) and "Booster seats" (P. 1-37) before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1-38 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0699
1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.

LRS0454
Front passenger position

LRS0451
Rear center position

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

LRS0452
Rear outboard position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. For additional information, see "Head restraints/headrests" (P. 1-5).

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child's hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child's shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in "Three-point type seat belt with retractor" (P. 1-13).

LRS3091

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch

in the ON position. The front passenger

air bag status light

may or may

not illuminate, depending on the size of

the child and the type of booster seat

being used. For additional information,

see "Front passenger air bag and status

light" (P. 1-51).

1-40 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
· Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)
· Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
· Rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
· Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
· Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bag
· Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the rear outboard seat passengers in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time.
Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bag
This system can help cushion the impact force to the driver's and front passenger's knees in certain collisions.
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger and rear seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the

occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, see "Seat belts" (P. 1-9).
The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

WARNING
· The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents
· The front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-51).

WRS0031
· The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away

1-42 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly use the seat belts.
· The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
· The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-51).
· Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.

ARS1133

ARS1041
WARNING
· Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

ARS1042
WARNING
· Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Preteens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1043

1-44 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1044

ARS1045

ARS1046
WARNING
· Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-19)

WRS0431
WARNING
Front and rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags: · The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

SSS0162

SSS0159

LRS3119
WARNING
· The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front and rear seat or near the side roof rails.

1-46 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.
WRS0032
WARNING · When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. · Do not use seat covers on the front or rear seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats)
1-48 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3624

1. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
2. Shoulder belt height adjustment (front seats)
3. Side-impact pressure sensor (driver's side shown; front passenger side similar)
4. Crash zone sensor
5. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
6. Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bags
7. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
8. Occupant classification system control unit
9. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor located in front passenger cushion frame)
10. Side satellite sensor (passenger's side shown; driver side similar) (if so equipped)
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags (passenger's side shown; driver side similar)
12. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag

13. Side satellite sensor (passenger's side shown; driver side similar)
14. Rear outboard seat-mounted sideimpact supplemental air bags
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger's NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following items.
· Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket.
· Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket.
· Make sure that there is nothing pressing against the rear of the seatback, such as a child restraint installed in the rear seat or an object stored on the floor.
· Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.
· Make sure that there is no object placed between the seat cushion and the center console or between the seat cushion and the door.

· If a forward-facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag may deploy in a collision. Also the front passenger air bag status light may not illuminate. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-19).
· Confirm the operating condition with the front passenger air bag status light.
· If you notice that the front passenger air bag status light is not operating as described in this section, get the occupant classification system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Until you have confirmed with a dealer that your front passenger seat occupant classification system is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions.

· Do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the front seat does contact the rear seat, the air bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and occupant classification sensor (weight sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensors are also monitored. Based on information from the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions, depending on the weight detected on the front passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are OFF, the front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag

will be off). For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-51). One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag system, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner's Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN air bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

1-50 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3091
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt, and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all

instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts, and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with

an occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) that turns the front passenger air

bag and front passenger supplemental

knee air bag on or off depending on the

weight applied to the front passenger seat.

The status of the front passenger air bag

(ON or OFF) is indicated by the front pas-

senger air bag status light

which is

located on the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the "ON" position, the front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows:
· Unoccupied front passenger's seat: The light is OFF and the front passenger
air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

· Front passenger seat occupied by a

small adult, child or child restraint as

outlined in this section: The

light

illuminates to indicate that the front

passenger air bag and front passenger

supplemental knee air bag are OFF and

will not inflate in a crash.

· Occupied front passenger seat and the

passenger meets the conditions as out-

lined in this section: The

light is OFF

to indicate that the front passenger air

bag and front passenger supplemental

knee air bag are operational.

In addition to the above, certain objects placed on the front passenger seat may also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight.

For additional information related to the normal operation and troubleshooting of this occupant classification sensor system, please see "Normal operation" (P. 1-53) and "Troubleshooting" (P. 1-54).

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and the child's weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For

small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or sudden stop. This can also result in the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-19) in this section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object's weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied. The light will not illuminate when the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly.

1-52 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the front passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). A NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with a dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in

the front passenger seat status. For example, if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the front passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-

ger air bag system, the supplemental air

bag warning light

, located in the me-

ter and gauges area of the instrument

panel, will blink. Have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions
· Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
· Make sure that a child restraint or other object is not pressing against the rear of the seatback.

· Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
· Make sure that the front passenger seat or seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
· Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the "Seats" (P. 1-2) section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the "Seat belts" (P. 1-9) section of this manual.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds allowing the system to classify the front passenger before the vehicle is put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status light.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

NOTE:
This vehicle's occupant classification sensor system locks the classification during driving so it is important that you confirm that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. Also, the occupant classification sensor system may recalculate the weight of the occupant when the vehicle comes to a stop (i.e. stop light, stop sign, etc.), so front passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated as outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag status light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat:
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
· An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
· A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
· A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.

· Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
· An object placed under the front passenger seat.
· An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the front passenger seat:
· Occupant is a small adult -- the air bag light is functioning as intended. The front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are suppressed.

1-54 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
· Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
· A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
· A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
· Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
· An object placed under the front passenger seat.
· An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person should be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
3. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or child restraint occupying the front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
· Small adult or child is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
· The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in the "Child restraints" section of this manual.
· An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.

· A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
· A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
· Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
· An object placed under the front passenger seat.
· An object placed between the seat cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions
WARNING
· Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.
· Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.
· Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

· Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.
· Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
· Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such

objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight sensor).
· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
· It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.
· A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

1-56 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3142
Front and rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front and rear outboard seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to

inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe offroading) may cause the curtain air bags to inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvic area of the front and rear outboard occupants. Curtain air bags

help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver, front passenger and rear outboard occupants seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.
The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
· Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front and rear seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front and rear door finisher and the front and rear seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflate.
· Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

· Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
· Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front and rear seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.
· It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

1-58 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3343
Driver's side
Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bags
The knee air bag is located in the knee bolster, on the driver's and front passenger's side. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The knee air bag is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain collisions.

LRS3344
Front passenger's side
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper knee air bag operation.
When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

The knee air bag helps to cushion the impact force on the knees of the driver and passenger. It can help reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating knee air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. The knee air bag provides restraint to the lower body.
The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the knee air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, this air bag module during inflation. The knee air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for a short time.
The knee air bag operates only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

WARNING
· Do not place any objects between the knee bolster and the driver's or passenger's seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a knee air bag inflates.
· Right after inflation, the knee air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the knee air bag system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the knee air bag system.
· Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system or suspension system. This could affect proper operation of the knee air bag system.
· Tampering with the knee air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the driver or passenger knee bolster or install additional trim material around the knee air bag.

· It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the knee air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the knee air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the knee air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this manual.
Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
WARNING
· The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.

· If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.
· It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system.
· If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

1-60 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.
When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s') activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in the
pretensioner system. For additional information, see "Supplemental air bag warning light" (P. 1-62). If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

LRS2617
1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located on the sun visors)
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

LRS0100

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying

in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-

tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates for about 7 seconds and

then turns off. This means the system is

operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:
· The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
· The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
· The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bags or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bags and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. These systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be placed in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

1-62 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
· Once a front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag or knee air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.
· The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

· If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked to verify it is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The OCS should be checked even if no air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Eco Drive Report (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Warning/Indicator lights (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Warning/Indicator lights (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Warning/Indicator lights (other) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Vehicle information display (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-25 How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection OFF switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55

Emergency Call (SOS) button (if so equipped) . . . 2-56 Emergency support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
USB/iPod® charging ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Wireless charger (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Wireless charger indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Wireless charger operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Rear Door Alert (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 Front-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64

Seatback pocket (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 Storage trays (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Console box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Personal Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Vents (P. 4-16) 2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/
turn signal switch (P. 2-45, 2-52)
2-2 Instruments and controls

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-12)

Trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-10)

Vehicle information display (if so

equipped) (P. 2-25)

5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-43)

6. Center display controls (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2, 4-7, 4-27)

Audio controls (P. 4-2, 4-7, 4-27)

7. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-51)

Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

8. Center display (P. 4-2, 4-7, 4-27)

9. Passenger's supplemental air bag

(P. 1-41)

10. Front passenger's supplemental knee

airbag (P. 1-59)

11. Glove box (P. 2-65)

12. Climate controls (P. 4-16, 4-24)

Heated seat switches (if so equipped)

(P. 2-52)

13. Shift lever (P. 5-20)

14. Push-button ignition switch (if so

equipped) (P. 5-13)

15. Wireless charger and indicator (if so

equipped) (P. 2-59)

LII2852 16. Power outlet (P. 2-62)

3. Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-41) Horn (P. 2-52)

USB connection port (P. 4-2, 4-36) AUX jack (if so equipped) (P. 4-2, 4-39)

* Refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-3

METERS AND GAUGES

LIC3561

Type A (if so equipped)

1. Tachometer

2. Warning and indicator lights

Vehicle information display

3. Speedometer

Odometer

4. Trip reset switch

Twin trip odometer

Instrument brightness control knob

Fuel gauge

2-4 Instruments and controls

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side the meter cluster. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display (Type A -- if so equipped) or the trip computer (Type B -- if so equipped) to the left of the speedometer.

1. Tachometer 2. Trip computer
Odometer Twin trip odometer

LIC4220
Type B (if so equipped) 3. Speedometer 4. Trip reset switch Instrument brightness control knob 5. Warning and indicator lights

Instruments and controls 2-5

LIC2218
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

LIC4584
Type A (if so equipped)
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer and the twin trip odometer
O1 are displayed in the vehicle information
display (Type A) (if so equipped) or the trip computer (Type B) (if so equipped) when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

2-6 Instruments and controls

LIC4585
Type B (if so equipped)

The low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated until the tires are inflated to the recommended COLD tire pressure. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is displayed each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-18), or "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5) and "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-27).

LIC4233
Loose fuel cap warning message (if so equipped)
Press the reset button OA for more than
1 second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message after the fuel cap has been tightened. For additional information, see "Fuel-filler cap" (P. 3-25).

LIC4221
Check tire pressure warning message (if so equipped)
The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is displayed when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. Check and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off.

Instruments and controls 2-7

LIC3562
Type A (if so equipped)
TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev
engine into the red zone O1 .

Type A (if so equipped): To access the ta-

chometer, use the

and

on the

steering wheel to navigate to the "Gauges"

display. For additional information, see

"How to use the vehicle information dis-

play" (P. 2-25).

LIC3536
Type B (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped): The tachometer is located on the left side of the meter cluster.
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

LIC3564
Type A (if so equipped)
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
Type A (if so equipped): The low fuel warning message shows in the vehicle information display when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

2-8 Instruments and controls

LIC3593
Type B (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped): The low fuel warning light illuminates when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).

The

indicates that the fuel-filler door

is located on the driver's side of the vehicle.

CAUTION
· If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service
· For additional information, see "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" (P. 2-20).
DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE)
Displays the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven before refueling. The value is calculated based on recent fuel economy, the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank, and the actual fuel consumption.
Changes in driving patterns or conditions can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result, the value displayed may differ from the actual distance that can be driven.

DTE display will change to "---" when the fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).
NOTE:
· The DTE value after refill is estimated based on recent fuel economy and amount of fuel added.
· If a small amount of fuel is added, or the ignition is on during refueling, the display may not be updated.
· Conditions that affect the fuel economy will also affect the estimated DTE value (city/highway driving, idle time, remote start time, terrain, seasonal weather, added vehicle weight, added deflectors, roof racks, etc.).

Instruments and controls 2-9

LIC3594

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, modes of the trip computer can be selected by pushing the TRIP RESET
switch OA .

Each time the TRIP RESET switch is pushed, the display changes as follows:

Trip A Trip B Odometer

The

switch for the trip computer is

located on the lower left side of the instru-

ment panel.

Each time the

switch is pushed, the

display will change as follows:

Average fuel economy Average speed Trip time Trip Distance

Average fuel economy (mpg or km/l)
The average fuel economy mode shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the change/reset switch for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first 1/3 mi (500 m) after a reset, the display shows (----).

Average speed (mph or km/h)
The average speed mode shows the average vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the change/reset switch for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows (----).

Trip time
The trip time mode shows the time since the last reset. The displayed time can be reset by pushing the change/trip switch for more than approximately 1 second.
Trip distance
The trip distance mode shows the distance traveled since the last reset. The trip distance can be reset by pushing the change/ trip switch for more than approximately 1 second.
Shipping mode
This message may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this message appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, see "Extended storage switch" (P. 2-63).

2-10 Instruments and controls

LSD4103
ECO DRIVE REPORT (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the ECO management display appears.
1 Previous 5 times (History) 2 Current fuel economy 3 Best fuel economy

The result of ECO evaluation is displayed 30 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the vehicle is driven at least 1/3 miles (500 meters).
1 The average fuel economy for the pre-
vious 5 times will be displayed.
2 The average fuel economy since the
last reset will be displayed.
3 The best fuel economy of the past his-
tory will be displayed.
The ECO Drive Report can be set to be ON or OFF.

Instruments and controls 2-11

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Warning/Indicator light (red)

Brake warning light

Charge warning light

Door open warning light (if so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light

High temperature warning light (red) (if so equipped)
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Master warning light (if so equipped)
Rear seat belt warning light and chime (if so equipped)

Warning/Indicator light (yellow)

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator light (if so equipped)

Engine start operation indicator light (if so equipped)

Front passenger air bag status light

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light
Low fuel warning light (if so equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light

Warning/Indicator light (other)
CRUISE indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
High Beam Assist indicator light (green)
High beam indicator light (blue)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (green) (if so equipped)
SET indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

2-12 Instruments and controls

Warning/Indicator light (red)
Seat belt warning light and chime
Security indicator light Supplemental air bag warning light

Warning/Indicator light (yellow)
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so equipped)
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Master warning light (if so equipped)
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (if so equipped)
Power steering warning light
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning light
Shift P (Park) warning light (if so equipped)
Slip indicator light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

Warning/Indicator light (other)
SPORT mode indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green)

Instruments and controls 2-13

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:

;

The following lights (if so equipped) will come on briefly and then go off:

If any light does not come on or operate in a way other than described, it may indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (red)
For additional information see, "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).

Brake warning

light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light comes on when the parking brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. For additional information, see "Brake fluid" (P. 8-10).
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
· Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.

· Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
· If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION
· Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. For additional information, see "Variable voltage control system" (P. 8-14).
· Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.
Door open warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Engine oil pressure warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, see "Engine oil" (P. 8-6).
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.
High temperature warning light (red) (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the high temperature warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates that the high temperature sensor in the engine coolant system is operational.
When driving, the high temperature warning light may turn off. This indicates that the engine coolant temperature is within the normal range.

CAUTION

If the high temperature warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the engine temperature is extremely high. Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. If the vehicle is overheated, continuing vehicle operation may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-11).

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.

The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the

light

should turn off if no other potential emis-

sion control system malfunction exists.

Instruments and controls 2-15

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. For additional information, see "Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test" (P. 10-22).

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

· MIL on steady -- An emission control sys-

tem malfunction has been detected.

Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel

Cap warning appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display (if so equipped) or the trip

computer (if so equipped). If the fuel-filler

cap is loose or missing, tighten or install

the cap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The

light should turn off after a few

driving trips. If the

light does not turn

off after a few driving trips, have the ve-

hicle inspected. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

You do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the dealer.

· MIL blinking -- An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: do not drive at speeds above 45 mph (72 km/h). avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. avoid steep uphill grades. if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.

Master warning light (if so equipped)
This light illuminates red when various vehicle information display warnings appear.
· Door open
· Parking brake release
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).
Rear seat belt warning light and chime (if so equipped)
This warning light appears for 65 seconds after the ignition is placed in the ON position and the engine is started.
This warning light shows the status of the three rear seat belts. When one of the rear seat belts are buckled, the corresponding rear seat belt indicator will appear white or not illuminate for models with a trip computer. When one of the rear seat belts are unbuckled, the corresponding rear seat belt indicator will appear red.
After a change in buckle status, a chime will sound and the warning will appear for another 65 seconds.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Seat belt warning light and chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten the driver and front passenger seat belts.
For additional information, see "Seat belts" (P. 1-9).
Security indicator light
This light blinks when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position.
The blinking security indicator light indicates that the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational.
For additional information, see "Security systems" (P. 2-42).
Supplemental air bag warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing:
· The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
· The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
· The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioner(s) may not function properly. For additional information, see "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" (P. 1-41).
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (yellow)
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally but without antilock assistance. For additional information, see "Brake system" (P. 5-117).

Instruments and controls 2-17

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light
This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is set to off in the vehicle information display, set to off using the AEB switch, or the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is turned off.
If the light illuminates when the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-83) or "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P. 5-95).
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this indicator light shows the shift lever position. For additional information, see "Driving the vehicle" (P. 5-19).
2-18 Instruments and controls

Engine start operation indicator light (if so equipped)
For vehicles equipped with push-button ignition this indicator illuminates when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ON position with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the push-button ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed.
Front passenger air bag status light
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be off depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.
For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-51).
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light
This indicator light will blink when the LDW system is operating. If the light illuminates yellow while the system is on, it may indicate a malfunction. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-26).
Low fuel warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty).
Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. The "CHECK TIRE PRES" (vehicles without a vehicle information display) also appears in the trip computer or the "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" (vehicles with a vehicle information display) appears in the vehicle information display.
When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver's door opening. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
For vehicles without a vehicle information display, the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated until the tires are inflated to the recommended COLD tire pressure. The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning

message is displayed each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For vehicles with a vehicle information display, the "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5).
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning message /"Tire Pressure Low-- Add Air" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, see "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5) and "Tire pressure" (P. 8-27).

WARNING
· Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
· If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or death. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure show on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver's door
Instruments and controls 2-19

opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
· Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
· The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.
2-20 Instruments and controls

· If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly.
· Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the four wheels correctly.
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the windshieldwasher fluid is at a low level. Add windshieldwasher fluid as necessary. For additional information, see "Windshield-washer fluid" (P. 8-10).
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.
The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the

light

should turn off if no other potential emis-

sion control system malfunction exists.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

· MIL on steady -- An emission control sys-

tem malfunction has been detected.

Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel

Cap warning appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display (if so equipped) or the trip

computer (if so equipped). If the fuel-filler

cap is loose or missing, tighten or install

the cap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The

light should turn off after a few

driving trips. If the

light does not turn

off after a few driving trips, have the ve-

hicle inspected. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

You do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the dealer.

Master warning light (if so equipped)
This light illuminates yellow when various vehicle information display warnings appear.
· No key
· I-Key system warning
· Low washer fluid
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (yellow) (if so equipped)
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds and then turns off. This light illuminates or blinks as follows:
· The light blinks in yellow when the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
· The light illuminates in yellow when it warns of a malfunction with the electrical steering lock system or the Intelligent Key system.

If the warning light illuminates in yellow while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to free the steering lock or to start the engine. If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, have the vehicle checked and repaired as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-2).
Power steering warning light
WARNING
· If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.
· When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-21

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the power steering warning light turns off. This indicates the power steering is operational.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering, but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, see "Power steering" (P. 5-116).
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning light
This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.

This light illuminates when the RAB system is set to off in the vehicle information display, set to off using the Automatic Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection OFF switch (if so equipped), or the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is turned off.
If the light illuminates when the RAB system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-76).
Shift P (Park) warning light (if so equipped)
This light blinks red and the key reminder chime sounds if the shift lever is in any position other than P (Park) and the ignition switch is in the OFF position. Return the shift lever to P (Park) with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the light will turn off. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the chime will turn off. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-2).

Slip indicator light

This indicator light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working; this is normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds after the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The

indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after

approximately 2 seconds if the system is

operational. If the light does not come on

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the VDC is turned off in the vehicle information display (if so equipped) or by pushing the VDC OFF switch (if so equipped). This indicates the VDC has been turned off.

2-22 Instruments and controls

Turn the VDC on using the vehicle information display (if so equipped) or by restarting the engine. For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-119).

The VDC light also comes on when the ig-

nition switch is placed in the ON position.

The light will turn off after a period of time if

the system is operational. If the light stays

on or comes on along with the

indica-

tor light while you are driving, have the VDC

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
VDC should remain on unless freeing a vehicle from mud or snow.
While the VDC system is operating, you might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (other)
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).
CRUISE indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
The light comes on when the cruise control switch is pushed. The light goes out when the switch is pushed again. When the cruise indicator light comes on, the cruise control system is operational. For additional information, see "Cruise control" (P. 5-51).
Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on. For additional information, see "Fog light switch" (P. 2-52).

High Beam Assist indicator light (green)
This indicator light illuminates when the headlights come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position with the high beams selected. This indicates that the high beam assist is operational.
For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-45).
High beam indicator light (blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
This indicator light will blink when the LDW system is operating.
For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-26).

Instruments and controls 2-23

NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (green) (if so equipped)
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds and then turns off. This light illuminates or blinks as follows:
· The light blinks in green when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power. Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-22).
If the warning light illuminates in yellow while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to free the steering lock or to start the engine. If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, have the vehicle checked and repaired as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-2).
SET indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
This light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system.

If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, see "Cruise control" (P. 5-51).
Side light and headlight indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light illuminates when the side light or headlights are on. If the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the side light and headlight indicator light will illuminate when the headlights turn on. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-45).
SPORT mode indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
This light illuminates and then turns off when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, and when the SPORT mode is selected.
For additional information, see "Drive Sport mode switch" (P. 5-22).

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green)
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.
NOTE:
In case of a turn signal light bulb malfunction, the turn signal will flash at a higher frequency when the turn signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on.
For additional information, see "Lights" (P. 8-24).
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-24 Instruments and controls

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (if so equipped)

Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off or to AUTO before leaving the vehicle.
NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one of the following improper operations is found. · The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
when locking the doors. · The Intelligent Key is taken outside the
vehicle when operating the vehicle.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key System. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-2).
Parking brake reminder chime
A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to zero.

LIC3565
The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as: · Audio Information · Drive Computer Information · Fuel Economy Information · Indicators and Warnings · Vehicle and Meter Display Settings · Odometer/twin trip odometer · Gear Position Indicator (P, R, N, D, L) · Distance To Empty and Fuel Indicator · Tire pressures

LIC3566

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be

changed using the

, and OK buttons located on the steer-

ing wheel.

- Use these buttons

to navigate the vehicle information

display.

2 OK - Change or select an item in the

vehicle information display.

(if so equipped) -- Returns to the

previous menu.

Instruments and controls 2-25

The OK,

and

buttons also

control audio and control panel functions

in some conditions. Most screens and

menus offer instruction prompts of the

steering switch buttons to indicate how to

control the vehicle information display.

Dots on the left side of the vehicle informa-

tion display will appear if there is more than

one page of menu items. The OK button

changes the audio source and the

buttons also control voice recognition

manual mode. For additional information,

refer to the separate NissanConnect®

Owner's Manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle in placed in the ON position the screens that display in the vehicle information display include: · Gauges · Audio · Fuel Economy · Drive Computer · Warning Review · Driving Aids · Settings
For additional information on warnings and indicators, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).
To control what items display in the vehicle information display, see "Customize display" (P. 2-31).

2-26 Instruments and controls

TRIP COMPUTER

LIC5087
Instruments and controls 2-27

1. Vehicle speed (MPH or km/h)

The vehicle speed mode shows the current vehicle speed and the average vehicle speed since the last reset.

Average vehicle speed:

Push the

buttons on the steering

wheel for longer than 1.5 seconds to reset.

The average vehicle display is updated every 30 seconds. the first 30 seconds after a rest, the display shows " '

2. Elapsed time and trip odometer

Elapsed time:

The elapsed time shows the time since the

last reset. Push the

buttons on the

steering wheel for longer than 1.5 seconds

to reset. The trip odometer is also reset at

the same time.

Trip odometer:

The trip odometer shows the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven since the

last reset. Push the

buttons on the

steering wheel for longer than 1.5 seconds

to reset. The elapsed time is also reset at

the same time.

3. Fuel economy display

Current fuel consumption:

The current fuel consumption mode shows the current fuel consumption.

Average fuel consumption:

The average fuel consumption mode

shows the average fuel consumption since

the last reset. Push the

buttons on

the steering wheel for longer than 1.5 sec-

onds to reset.

The display is updated every 30 seconds. For about the first 1/3 of a mile (500 m) after a reset, the display shows " ."

The average fuel consumption is also rest in the lower display. For additional information, refer to the separate For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual.

4. Navigation (if so equipped)
When the route guidance is set in the navigation system, this item shows the navigation route information.

5. Audio
The audio mode shows the status of audio information.
6. Driving Aids
The driving aids mode shows the operating condition for the following systems (if so equipped): · Forward
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
· Lane: Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
· Blind Spot: Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-33), "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-26), "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-83), or "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P. 5-95).
7. Tire Pressures
The tire pressure mode shows the pressure of all four tires while the vehicle is driven.

2-28 Instruments and controls

When the "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air"

warning appears, the display can be

switched to the tire pressure mode by

pushing the

buttons to reveal addi-

tional details on the displayed warning.

For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-18), "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5), "Flat tire" (P. 8-35) and "Types of tires" (P. 8-35)

8. Compass
This display indicates the direction the vehicle is heading.

SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display as well as the model for several vehicle functions: · VDC Setting · Driver Assistance · Customize Display · Vehicle Settings · TPMS Settings

· Maintenance · Clock · Unit/Language · Factory Reset

VDC Setting
The VDC Setting menu allows the user to enable or disable the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.

System

Menu item

Explanation
Allows the user to turn the VDC system on or off. For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-119).

Instruments and controls 2-29

Driver Assistance
The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the various driving aids and assistance options. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Lane Blind Spot

Menu item
Lane Departure Warning
Blind Spot Warning

Emergency Brake

Side Indicator Brightness
Front

Rear

Parking Aids Sonar Rear Sensor Display Volume Range Cross Traffic

Driver Attention Alert

Timer Alert Low Temperature Alert

Explanation Displays the available lane options. Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW) " (P. 5-26). Displays the available blind spot options. Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW) " (P. 5-33). Allows user to change the brightness of the side indicator.
Displays the available emergency braking options. Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-83). Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-76). Displays the available parking aids options. Displays the available sonar options. For additional information, see "Rear Sonar System" (RSS) (P. 5-122). Allows user to turn the rear sensor on or off. Allows user to turn the display on or off. Allows user to adjust the volume to High/Med/Low. Allows user to adjust the range to Far/Mid/Near. Allows user to turn rear cross traffic alert on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-43). Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system on or off. For additional information, see "Intelligent Driver Alertness" (I-DA) (P. 5-110). Allows user to set or reset an alert at a specific time interval. Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off.

2-30 Instruments and controls

Customize Display
The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Main Menu Selection
Home Drive Computer Driving Aids Tire Pressures Coolant Temp. CRUISE ECO Info Settings ECO Drive Report View History Welcome Effect Gauges Animation

Explanation Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the status screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the tire pressures screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the coolant temp. screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the cruise control screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Displays the available ECO info settings. Select to display this report when the ignition in switch is placed in the ON position. Select to view the vehicle's history. Displays the available welcome effect settings. Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off. Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-31

Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Rear Door Alert
Horn & Alert Alert Only No horn, No Alert Lighting Welcome Headlight
Welcome & Farewell Welcome Farewell OFF Auto Room Lamp Light Sensitivity Auto Light Light Off Delay
Turn Indicator 3 Flash Pass
Locking Ext. Door Switch

Explanation Displays the available Rear Door Alert options. For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert" (P. 2-61). When selected, the alert is displayed and the horn sounds. When selected, only the alert is displayed. When selected, no alert or horn will be active. Displays the available lighting settings. Displays the available welcome headlight options. Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they approach and leave the vehicle. Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they approach the vehicle. Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they leave the vehicle. Allows user to set the headlights to turn off when not driving. Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off. Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle. Allows user to turn the auto light feature on or off. Allows user to change the duration of time, from 0 to 180 seconds, that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off. Displays the available turn indicator settings. Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass feature on or off. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-45). Displays the available locking settings. Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.

2-32 Instruments and controls

Menu item Selective Unlock
Auto Door Unlock Shift to P IGN OFF OFF
Answer Back Horn
Wipers Speed Dependent
Remote Engine Start

Explanation
Allows user to turn the selective unlock feature on or off. When turned on, only the driver's door is unlocked after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver's or front passenger's side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 30 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.
Displays the available auto door unlock options.
Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.
Doors will have to be manually unlocked.
Allows user to turn the answer back horn feature on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash twice when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.
Displays the available wipers settings.
Allows user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off.
Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start feature on or off. When turned off, the vehicle cannot be started remotely. For additional information, see "Remote Engine Start" (P. 3-19).

TPMS Settings
The TPMS settings menu allows the user to change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display.

Menu item TPMS Settings
Tire Pressure Unit

Explanation Displays available TPMS Settings. Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.

Instruments and controls 2-33

Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.

WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, see "Changing wheels and tires" (P. 8-37). Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

Oil and Filter Tire Other
Clock

Menu item

Explanation Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Clock

Menu item

Explanation
Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that can be made include manually setting the time and 12H/24H format. If these options do not appear, the clock must be set within the center display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual (if so equipped).

2-34 Instruments and controls

Unit/Language
The unit/language menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display.

Mileage/Fuel Tire Pressures Temperature Language

Menu item

Explanation Displays the available mileage/fuel display units and allows user to select preferred unit for display. Allows user to select the tire pressure display units. Allows user to select the temperature display units. Displays the available language options and allows user to select preferred language for display.

Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.

Factory Reset

Menu item

Explanation
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

Instruments and controls 2-35

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
The following messages may appear in your vehicle information display.
I-Key System Error: See Owner's Manual
After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, this warning appears for a period of time and then turns off.
The I-Key System Error message warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the warning appears on while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine.
If the warning appears on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Key Battery Low
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power.
If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-22).

No Key Detected
This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-7).
Alarm - Time for a break?
This indicator appears when the driver enables the Timer Alert function within the Driver Assistance settings and the selected set time is expired. The time is based on ignition on time and can be set up to six hours.
Brightness indicator
This indicator shows the brightness adjustment of the instrument panel. For additional information, see "Instrument brightness control" (P. 2-50).
Check Back Seat For All Articles
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position,

and the driver exits the vehicle. This message alerts the driver, after a period of time, to check for items in the rear seat after the audible alert has been provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "How to use the vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).
For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert" (P. 2-61).
CVT Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is a problem with the CVT system. If this warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Door/Trunk Open
This warning appears when a door or the trunk has been opened.

2-36 Instruments and controls

Drive sport mode indicator
A small "S" appears to the right of the Transmission Shift Position indicator in the vehicle information display when the drive sport mode is engaged.
Activate the drive sport mode by pressing the switch on the shift lever while the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position.
For additional information, see "Driving the vehicle" (P. 5-19).
Engine start operation (for Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models)
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine directly in any position of the ignition switch.

Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)
This indicator appears when the battery of the Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not communicating normally.
If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge" (P. 5-15).
Headlight System Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with the system. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-45).
High Coolant Temp: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when the temperature of the engine coolant is too high. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Avoid quick starting or abrupt acceleration. When the warning turns off, the vehicle can be driven.

If the warning appears again soon after it turns off, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Low Fuel
This warning appears when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For additional information, see "Settings" (P. 2-29).
Oil and Filter
This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for changing the engine oil and filter. You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing these items. For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, see "Maintenance and schedules" (P. 9-2 ).

Instruments and controls 2-37

Other
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire rotation. The distance for checking or replacing the items can be set or reset.
Outside Temperature Display
The outside temperature display appears in the center region of the vehicle information display.
Power turned off to save the battery
This message appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned off. For additional information, see "Push-button ignition switch positions" (P. 5-14).
Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle information display after a period of time if the ignition switch is in the ON position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional information, see "Push-button ignition switch positions" (P. 5-14).
2-38 Instruments and controls

Push brake and start switch to drive
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position and the vehicle has not been started. Start the engine by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.
This message also appears when the vehicle has been started using the Remote Engine Start function (if so equipped). Push the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed to place the ignition switch in the ON position. For additional information, see "Remote Engine Start" (P. 3-19).
Rear Door Alert is activated
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the Rear Door Alert system is active and can remind the driver to check the back seat.
· Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select "Dismiss Message" to clear the display for a period of time. If no selection is made, this message automatically turns off after a period of time.
· Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select "Disable Alert" to disable the horn alert for the remainder of the current trip.

WARNING
Selecting "Dismiss Message" during a stop within a trip temporarily dismisses the message for that stop without turning the system off. Alerts can be provided for other stops during the trip. Selecting "Disable Alert" turns off the Rear Door Alert system for the remainder of a trip and no audible alert will be provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "How to use the vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).
For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert" (P. 2-61).
Rear seat belt reminder
This rear seat belt reminder appears after starting the engine.
If any of the rear passenger seat belts are not fastened, the seat belt icon illuminates in red to show which seat belt is not fastened. When a rear passenger's seat belt

has been securely fastened, the color of the corresponding seat belt icon will change. The warning will automatically turn off after approximately 35 seconds.
A chime will sound one time and the rear seat belt warning will appear if a rear passenger's seat belt is unfastened. The chime will not sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 10 mph (15 km/h). The seat belt icon illuminates in red until the corresponding rear passenger's seat belt is fastened. The warning will automatically turn off after approximately 35 seconds.
Release Parking Brake
This warning appears in the message area of the vehicle information display when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven.
Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights
This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-45).

Shift to Park
This warning appears when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
If this warning appears, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and start the engine.
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, see "Extended storage switch" (P. 2-63).
Steering lock release malfunction indicator
This indicator appears when the steering lock cannot be released.
If this indicator appears, push the ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left.

Tire
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for replacing tires. You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires.
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, see "Changing wheels and tires" (P. 8-37). Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

Instruments and controls 2-39

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-18) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5).
TPMS Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with your TPMS. If this warning comes on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Transmission Shift Position Indicator
This indicator shows the transmission shift position.

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) emergency warning indicator This indicator appears along, with an audible warning, when the system detects the possibility of a forward collision.
For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-83).
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator
This indicator shows when the BSW system is engaged.
For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-33).
Cruise control indicator
This indicator shows the cruise control system status.
For additional information, see "Cruise control" (P. 5-51).

Driver Attention Alert -- System Fault
This warning appears when the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system is not functioning properly. For additional information, see "Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)" (P. 5-110).
Driver Attention Alert Take a Break?
This alert appears when the system has detected that the driver may be displaying fatigue or a lack of attention.
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator
This indicator shows the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The status is shown by the color. For additional information, see "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)" (P. 5-53).
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator
This indicator shows when the LDW system is engaged.
For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-26).

2-40 Instruments and controls

Malfunction
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly: · Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection · Blind Spot Warning (BSW) · Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) · Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW)
If one or more of these warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Parking Sensor
This indicator appears when the sensor is activated. For additional information, see "Rear Sonar System (RSS)" (P. 5-122).
Parking Sensor Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with the system. For additional information, see "Rear Sonar System (RSS)" (P. 5-122).

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system indicator
This indicator appears to indicate the status of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-76).
System Fault
This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-76).
Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction
This warning appears when there is a radar obstruction detected. For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-83) or "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)" (P. 5-53), or "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P. 5-95).
Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature
This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than approximately 104°F (40°C). For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-26).

Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction
This message appears when the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable because a radar blockage is detected. For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-33) or "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-43).
Vehicle ahead detection indicator
This indicator appears when the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system is engaged and has detected a vehicle.
For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection " (P. 5-83) or "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P. 5-95).

Instruments and controls 2-41

SECURITY SYSTEM

LIC2930
Your vehicle has one type of security system: · NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an auto-

mated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition reoccurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference. (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

2-42 Instruments and controls

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, seek service for the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LIC0474
Security indicator light
The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position.
This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

SWITCH OPERATION

LIC4182

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

Instruments and controls 2-43

CAUTION
· Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
· Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.
· Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshield-washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshieldwasher fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
· Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.

NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.
The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:
1 Intermittent -- intermittent operation
can be adjusted by turning the knob in
the OA direction (faster) or OB direction
(slower).
2 Low -- continuous low speed operation
3 High -- continuous high speed
operation
Push the lever up O4 to have one sweep
operation (MIST) of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you O5 to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFROSTER SWITCH
LIC3570
Type A (if so equipped) To defrost the rear window glass, start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. To defrost the outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the outside mirror defroster switch on. The outside mirror defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

2-44 Instruments and controls

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

LIC3600
Type B (if so equipped) The rear window/outside mirror defroster (if so equipped) automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes.
NOTE:
Use defroster and/or outside mirror defroster when engine is running to avoid discharging the battery.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

LIC2635
Type A (if so equipped)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

1 Rotate the switch to the

position,

and the front parking, tail, license plate,

and instrument panel lights will come

on. The

will illuminate in the meter.

2 Rotate the switch to the

position,

and the headlights will come on and all

the other lights remain on.

Type B (if so equipped) CAUTION

LIC4237

Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Instruments and controls 2-45

Autolight system

LIC5090

The autolight system allows the headlights to turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can:
· Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark.
· Turn off all the lights when it is light.
· Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed.

NOTE: Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).

To turn on the autolight system:

1. For USA: Turn the headlight switch to the
AUTO position O1 .

For CAN: Turn the headlight switch to the

AUTO O1 or

position.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain on for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off:

For USA: Turn the switch to the OFF,

position.

For CAN: Turn the switch to the position.

The Intelligent Auto Headlight system can turn on the headlights automatically when it is dark and turn off the headlights when it is light.
If the ignition switch is placed in the ON position when the parking brake is applied, the headlights remain off.
The headlights will turn on automatically at twilight (if so equipped) or in rainy weather (when the windshield wiper is operated continuously).
If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position and one of the doors is opened and this condition is continued, the headlights remain on for 5 minutes.

2-46 Instruments and controls

High Beam Assist
The High Beam Assist system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 18 mph (30 km/h) and above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when the headlight high beam is on, the headlight will be switched to the low beam automatically.

LIC4223
Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located in the top
side O1 of the instrument panel. The auto-
light sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position, your vehicle's battery could become discharged.

LIC5092

Headlight beam select

1 To select the high beam function, push

the lever forward. The high beam lights

come on and the

light illuminates

in the meter.

2 Pull the lever back to select the low
beam.

3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off.

WARNING
· The High Beam Assist system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for safe driving operation. The driver should remain alert at all times, ensure safe driving practices and switch the high beams and low beam manually when necessary.
· The high beam or low beam may not switch automatically under the following conditions. Switch the high beam and low beam manually.
During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, wind, etc.).
When a light source similar to a headlight or tail light is in the vicinity of the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-47

When the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle are turned off, when the color of the light is affected due to foreign materials on the lights, or when the light beam is out of position.
When there is a sudden, continuous change in brightness.
When driving on a road that passes over rolling hills, or a road that has level differences.
When driving on a road with many curves.
When a sign or mirror-like surface is reflecting intense light towards the front of the vehicle.
When the container, etc. being towed by a leading vehicle is reflecting intense light.
When a headlight on your vehicle is damaged or dirty.
When the vehicle is leaning at an angle due to a punctured tire, being towed, etc.

· The timing of switching the low beam and high beam may change under the following situations.
The brightness of the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle.
The movement and direction of the oncoming vehicle and the leading vehicle.
When only one light on the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is illuminated.
When the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle.
Road conditions (incline, curve, the road surface, etc.).
The number of passengers and the amount of luggage.

LIC5093

High Beam Assist operation

To activate the High Beam Assist system,

turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po-
sition O1 and push the lever forward O2

(high beam position). The

High Beam

Assist indicator light in the meter will illumi-

nate while the headlights are turned on.

If the High Beam Assist indicator light does not illuminate in the above condition, it may indicate that the system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-48 Instruments and controls

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), the headlight uses the low beam.

To turn off the High Beam Assist system,

turn the headlight switch to the

posi-

tion or select the low beam position by

placing the lever in the neutral position.

LSD4102
Ambient image sensor maintenance
The ambient image sensor OA for the High
Beam Assist system is located in front of the inside mirror. To maintain the proper operation of the high beam assist system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
· Always keep the windshield clean.
· Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the ambient image sensor.
· Do not strike or damage the areas around the ambient image sensor. Do not touch the sensor lens that is located on the ambient image sensor.

If the ambient image sensor is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position while the headlight switch is in the

position, the headlights will

turn off after a period of time.

NOTE:

The Battery Saver system may be disabled. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).

CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the AUTO or OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Instruments and controls 2-49

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) auto-

matically illuminate when the engine is

started with the parking brake released.

The DRL operate with the headlight switch

in the AUTO or OFF position. Turn the head-

light switch to the

position for full

illumination when driving at night. (The DRL

will turn off.)

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate. The DRL illuminate once the parking brake is released. The DRL will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch ON for interior controls and switches to illuminate, as those remain OFF while the switch is in the AUTO or OFF position.

WARNING
When the DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

2-50 Instruments and controls

LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) SYSTEM (Type B) (if so equipped)

The LED DRL automatically illuminate at

100% intensity when the engine is started

and the parking brake released. The LED

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) operate with

the headlight switch in the AUTO or OFF

position. When you turn the headlight

switch to the

position for full illumina-

tion, the LED lights switch from LED DRL to

the park function.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the LED DRL do not illuminate. The LED DRL illuminate when the parking brake is released. The LED DRL will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch ON for interior controls and switches to illuminate, as those remain OFF while the switch is in the AUTO or OFF position.

WARNING
When the LED DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC4150
Type A (if so equipped)
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
Turn the control knob OA to adjust the
brightness of instrument panel lights.

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.
NOTE:
The 3 flash pass feature may be disabled. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).

LIC4151
Type B (if so equipped)

LIC5094
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
1 Move the lever up or down to signal
the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.
Lane change signal
2 Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.

Instruments and controls 2-51

HORN

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

LIC5095

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

switch to the

position,

then turn the fog light switch to the

position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight

switch in the AUTO position, the headlights

must be on, then turn the fog light switch

to the

position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

LIC3568
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

LIC3973
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.

2-52 Instruments and controls

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SWITCH (if so equipped)

CAUTION
· The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.
· Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
· Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
· Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
· Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.
· When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
· If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Push the switch once for the high (2 indicators illuminated) setting. Push the switch again for the low (1 indicator illuminated) setting.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light(s) will remain on as long as the switch is on.
3. Push the switch again to turn it off (no indicators illuminated).
4. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to push the switch to turn it off.

LIC5039
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch is used to turn on and off the LDW system. When the LDW switch is pushed, the LDW system will turn on and the LDW indicator light on the switch will illuminate. When the LDW switch is pushed again, the LDW system will turn off and the LDW indicator light will turn off.
The LDW system warns the driver with a warning light and chime that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane. For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW) " (P. 5-26).

Instruments and controls 2-53

The Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system and Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) system may be linked with the LDW system. For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-83) or "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P. 5-95).

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-83).

2-54 Instruments and controls

LIC4314
The Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system is automatically enabled when the vehicle is started.
To turn the system off, push the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection OFF switch (if so equipped). The light will go off, and the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light will illuminate in the meter. Pushing the switch will also turn off the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC

OFF switch. The

indicator light and the

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with

Pedestrian Detection system warning light

will come on and the Rear Automatic Brak-

ing (RAB) system will turn off.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-119) and "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-83).

LIC4315
The vehicle should be driven with the VDC system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

LIC5040
WARNING
The Rear Sonar System is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly.
The RSS (if so equipped) is active when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the shift lever is in R (Reverse). The indicator light on the switch will turn on.

Instruments and controls 2-55

EMERGENCY CALL (SOS) BUTTON (if so equipped)

When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft (1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.
The RSS can be disabled by pushing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled, the indicator light on the switch will turn off.
The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
For additional information, see Rear Sonar System (RSS) (P. 5-122).

EMERGENCY SUPPORT
NissanConnect® Services provide various services to support dealing with emergencies of the subscribed vehicle and the driver.
For example, in case of an illness or serious injury, you can seek support by pressing the in-vehicle Emergency Call (SOS) button and connecting to the NissanConnect® Services Response Center. The Nissan Connect® Services Response Center can specify the location of the vehicle via GPS, and the information will be sent to the police or other agencies as needed.
For information about other Nissan Connect® Services emergency support related services, contact the NissanConnect® Customer Support line at 18554266628 or refer to the NissanConnect® Services website www.nissanusa.com/connect (for U.S.) or www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect (English) / www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr (French) (for Canada).

WARNING
· Please note that the Automatic Collision Notification service and Emergency Call function cannot be used in the following conditions: Emergency functions and services will not be available without a paid subscription to Nissan Connect® Services. The NissanConnect® Services network system is disabled. The vehicle moves outside the service area where the TCU (Telematics Control Unit) is connected to the system. The vehicle is outside the area where the cellular network service is receivable. The vehicle is in a location with poor signal reception such as tunnels, underground parking garages, behind buildings or in mountainous areas. The line is busy. The TCU (Telematics Control Unit) or other systems of your vehicle are not working properly.

2-56 Instruments and controls

It may not be possible to make an emergency call depending on the severity of a collision and/or emergency.
· Park the vehicle in a safe location and set the parking brake before operating the Emergency Call (SOS) button.
· Only use this service in case of an emergency. There may be a penalty for inappropriate use of the service.
· Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Individuals who use a pacemaker should contact the device manufacturer regarding any possible effects before using the system.
· The TCU (Telematics Control Unit) antenna is installed inside the upper central part of the instrument panel. An occupant should not get any closer to the antenna than specified by the pacemaker manufacturer. The radio waves from the TCU antenna may adversely affect the operation of the pacemaker while using the NissanConnect® Services.

Making an emergency call
The Emergency Call (SOS) button is located near the map light.
1. Push the cover O1 to expose the Emergency Call (SOS) button O2 .
2. Press the Emergency Call (SOS) button to make an emergency call.
3. When the line is connected, speak to the Response Specialist.

LIC5075
If you want to cancel the emergency call, press and hold the Emergency Call (SOS) button for a few seconds.
NOTE:
· After the Emergency Call (SOS) button is pressed, it may take some time until the system initiates connection, depending on the technical environment and whether the TCU (Telematics Control Unit) is being used by the other services.

Instruments and controls 2-57

USB/iPod® CHARGING PORTS

· An indicator light on the Emergency call (SOS) button shows the readiness of the emergency support system. If the indicator light is not illuminated, pressing the Emergency Call (SOS) button does not connect your vehicle to the Response Specialist. The indicator light blinks while connected to the NissanConnect® Services Response Center.
· Even when the indicator light is illuminated, connection to the NissanConnect® Services Response Center may not be possible. If this occurs in an emergency situation, contact the authorities by other means.
· To avoid disconnecting the line, keep the engine running during an emergency call, if it is safe to do so.

LIC5034
Top of center console (if so equipped) 1. Type-A USB
2. Type-C USB
There are USB/iPod® charging ports located on top of the center console, on the back of the center console or inside the console box. These ports will charge compatible devices.

LIC5088
Back of center console (if so equipped)
NOTE:
· The USB/iPod® charging ports will not operate with the display screen. Only the USB connection port located on the instrument panel, below the temperature controls, will operate USB/iPod® devices through the audio system.
· For best results, it is recommended to use the manufacturer cables, which are sold separately. A USB Type-A to USB Type-C adapter (or vice versa) can also be purchased separately; however, results may vary.

2-58 Instruments and controls

WIRELESS CHARGER (if so equipped)

LIC5123
Inside console box (if so equipped)

LIC5100
1. Indicator
2. Charging pad The wireless charger is located on the front of the center console. Lay the smartphone on the pad of the wireless charger. Charging will start automatically. The smartphone will be charged continuously while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
NOTE:
The wireless charger requires the vehicle doors to be closed before charging will start. If the doors are opened, the charging function will not operate.

WARNING
· Never put metallic materials between the wireless charger and a smartphone.
· Those who use a pacemaker or other medical equipment should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
· Never put cloth over the smartphone during charging process.
· Never charge a smartphone when it is wet.
· Never put metallic materials or small goods such as a cigarette lighter, Intelligent Key or memory drive.
CAUTION
· Do not put an RFID/NFC/credit card between the wireless charger and a smartphone. This could cause data corruption in the card.
· Do not use the wireless charger with dust accumulated or dirt on the pad.
· Do not hit the surface of the wireless charger.

Instruments and controls 2-59

· Do not spill liquid (water, drinks, etc.) on the charging pad.
· Do not use grease, oil or alcohol for cleaning charging pad.
WIRELESS CHARGER INDICATOR
The indicator ( 1 ) will illuminate in orange when the charging process is started.
When the charging has completed, the indicator illuminates in green.
If a malfunction occurs or the charging process has stopped, the indicator will blink in orange for 8 seconds then turn off.
WIRELESS CHARGER OPERATION
To use the wireless charger, it is necessary to seat the smartphone well within the charging pad. To maximize charging performance, ensure the smartphone is fully seated on the center of the charging pad
over the "Qi" logo OA . Because the location
of the power receiver may vary depending on the smartphone, you will need to try and find the area that suits your smartphone.
Because some smartphone cases or accessories may adversely affect charging, remove them before wireless charging. Turn off the vibration function of the smartphone before wireless charging.
2-60 Instruments and controls

NOTE:
· Only a Qi compatible smartphone can be used.
· The smartphone may be warmed during charging process and the charging may stop by the protection function of the wireless charger. This is not a malfunction. If this occurs, restart charging after the smartphone has cooled down. The indicator will blink in orange then turn off.
· The wireless charging process may be stopped by the status of the smartphone (battery temperature, etc.).
· If a radio noise interference occurs during charging process, put the smartphone onto the center ("Qi" logo) position of the wireless charger.
· The wireless charging process will stop during process of searching the Intelligent Key.
· The wireless charging process will not be started when a USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable is connected to the smartphone. The indicator may illuminate in orange or blink if the smartphone is put on the wireless charger with a USB cable connected. However, charging is not performed.

· Depending on the type of the smartphone, the indicator may remain illuminated in orange even when the charging process has been completed.
FCC ID: BEJWC500MNM IC: 2703H-WC500MNM This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 15cm between the radiator and your body.

REAR DOOR ALERT (if so equipped)

ISED Compliance Statement This device complies with RSS-Gen of IC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by LG Vehicle Components Company, will void the user's authority to operate the equipment. ISED RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with ISED RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This equipment should be installed to operate with a minimum distance of 15 cm between the radiator and the end-user's body and arms.

The Rear Door Alert system functions under certain conditions to indicate there may be an object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle.
The Rear Door Alert system is initially disabled. The driver can enable the system using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" (P. 2-36).
When the system is enabled:
· The system is activated when a rear door is opened and closed within 10 minutes of the vehicle being driven. When the driver door is closed and the system is activated, a visual message appears in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert is activated" (P. 2-38).
· If a rear door is opened and closed but the vehicle is not driven within approximately 10 minutes, the system will not be activated. A rear door must be opened and closed and the car driven within 10 minutes for the system to activate.

When the Rear Door Alert system is activated:
· When the driver puts the vehicle in the P (Park) position, a notification message appears in the vehicle information display with the options to "Dismiss Message" or "Disable Alert" if desired. Select "Disable Alert" to temporarily disable for that stop. No selection or `Dismiss Message" will keep the alert enabled for that stop.
· If the alert is enabled when a driver exits the vehicle, a message will appear in the vehicle information display that states "Check Back Seat For All Articles."
If "Horn & Alert" setting is selected: An audible horn sound will occur after
a short time unless a rear door is opened and closed within a short time to deactivate the alert. If the doors are locked before the alert is deactivated by opening a rear door, the horn will sound. If the trunk is opened before a rear door is opened, the horn will be delayed until after the trunk is closed.

Instruments and controls 2-61

POWER OUTLETS

NOTE:
If "Alert Only" setting is selected, the message alert will still be shown in the vehicle information display but the horn will not sound.

WARNING
· If the driver selects "Disable Alert", no audible alert will be provided regardless of rear door open/close status.
· There may be times when there is an object or passenger in the rear seat(s) but the audible alert does not sound. For example, if rear seat passengers enter or exit the vehicle during a trip.
· The system does not directly detect objects or passengers in the rear seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat(s).
NOTE:
There may be times when the horn sounds but there are no objects or passengers in the rear seat(s).
For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert is activated" (P. 2-38).
2-62 Instruments and controls

LIC5126
Instrument panel The power outlet is for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. The outlet is rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
CAUTION
· The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use.
· Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information

· Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
· Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.
· Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
· Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.
· Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned off.
· Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.
· When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

LIC3581
The extended storage switch is used when the vehicle is in transit from the factory. It is
located in the fuse panel OA which is on the
driver's side left kick panel, near the floor, on the inside of the panel. If any electrical equipment does not operate, ensure the extended storage switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.

Pulled position

LIC3266

Pushed position

LIC3268

Instruments and controls 2-63

STORAGE

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

LIC4088

LIC0016
SEATBACK POCKET (if so equipped)
The seatback pocket is located on the back of the passenger's seat. The pocket can be used to store maps.

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the driver's and/or front passenger's NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (if so equipped), please observe the following items:
· Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket or head restraint/headrest.
· Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket.

2-64 Instruments and controls

LIC5036
STORAGE TRAYS (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.

LIC3580
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

LIC5124
CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped)
To open the console box, pull on the lever
O1 and raise the lid O2 .
To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

Instruments and controls 2-65

LIC5037
Center console without armrest (if so equipped)
CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
· Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.
· Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

LIC5125
Center console with armrest (if so equipped)
CAUTION
· Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident.
· Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers.

2-66 Instruments and controls

LIC4089
Bottle holder -- front

WINDOWS

Bottle holder -- rear

LIC4090

POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
· Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver's or passenger's door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled.

LIC3208
1. Window lock switch 2. Power door lock switch 3. Front passenger side switch 4. Right rear passenger side switch 5. Left rear passenger side switch
6. Driver's side automatic switch
Driver's side power window switch
The driver's side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows.

Instruments and controls 2-67

To open a window, push the switch to the detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch to the detent and continue to hold up until the desired window position is reached.
Locking passengers' windows
When the window lock switch is depressed, only the driver's side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

LIC4228
Front passenger's power window switch
The passenger's window switch operates only the corresponding passenger's window. To open the window partially, push the switch down lightly until the desired window position is reached. To close the window, pull the switch up until the desired window position is reached.

LIC2663
Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To open the window, push the switch and hold
it down O1 . To close the window, pull the switch up O2 .

2-68 Instruments and controls

LIC0410
Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, push the window switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.

Auto-reverse function (if so equipped)
If the control unit detects something caught in the window as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.
The auto-reverse function can be activated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

When power window switch does not operate
If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the power window system:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed.
4. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete. The power window automatically opens or closes depending on if the automatic down or up function is selected.
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other windows.
If the power window function does not operate properly after performing the above procedure have the system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-69

INTERIOR LIGHTS

LIC3985
The interior light has a three-position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position.
When the switch is in the ON position O3 ,
the interior lights illuminate, regardless of door position. The lights will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
When the switch is in the O2 position, the
interior lights will stay on for a period of time when:

· The doors are unlocked by the key or the power door lock switch while all doors are closed and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
· The driver's door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch (if so equipped).
· The key is removed from the ignition switch (if so equipped) while all doors are closed.
The light will turn off while the timer is activated when: · The driver's door is locked by the key, or
the power door lock switch. · The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
When the switch is in the OFF position O1 ,
the interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door position.
The lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

LIC3988
MAP LIGHTS
To turn the map lights on, push the switch
to the O1 position. To turn them off, push the switch to the O2 position.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

2-70 Instruments and controls

SIC2063A
Center personal light
PERSONAL LIGHT
The personal light has a three-position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position.
When the switch is in the ON position O1 ,
the light illuminates, regardless of door position.
When the switch is in the DOOR position O2 ,
the light illuminates by opening a door.
The personal light will stay on for about 15 seconds when:

· The doors are unlocked while the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and all doors are closed.
· The driver's door is opened and then closed while the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
· The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while all doors are closed.
The personal light will turn off while the 15 second timer is activated when:
· The driver's door is locked by the key fob, a key or the lock-unlock switch.
· The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
When the switch is in the OFF position O3 ,
the light does not illuminate, regardless of door position.
Some vehicles are equipped with a battery saver feature that will automatically turn off the interior lights after approximately 10 minutes if:
· doors are open, or
· the interior light switch is in the ON position.

NOTE:
If the interior lights are turned off automatically by the battery saver feature, the ignition switch must be placed in the ON position before the interior lights will illuminate again.
For information regarding the interior light bulb replacement, see "Exterior and interior lights" (P. 8-25).
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.
TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.
The light will go off after a period of time if the trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
For additional information, see "Exterior and interior lights" (P. 8-25).

Instruments and controls 2-71

MEMO
2-72 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Locking with key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
NISSAN Intelligent Key® system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 How to use the remote keyless entry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Troubleshooting guide (Continuously Variable Transmission only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-19 Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Key operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Opener operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Interior trunk access (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-24
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Opener operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Tilt and telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Card holder (driver's side only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

KEYS

LPD3050
1. Master key (two sets)
2. Key number plate
A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have lost all your keys. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number.

LDI3697
Type A (if so equipped) 1. Intelligent Keys (two sets)
2. Mechanical keys
3. Key number plate (one plate)
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so equipped)
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle's Intelligent Key System components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components.

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LDI3698
Type B (if so equipped)
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered prior to use with the Intelligent Key System and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
· Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.
· Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
· Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object.

· Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
· Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
· Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
· Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.
· Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

LPD3338
Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the driver's door and trunk lid (if so equipped).
For additional information, see "Doors" (P. 3-4) and "Trunk lid" (P. 3-22).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

DOORS

CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can be duplicated without knowing the key number. As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.

After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any virtual key accessories (if so equipped) will also have to be reregistered. Any key that is not given to the dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function.

When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors cannot be opened using the inside or outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
WARNING
· Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders.
· Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

Driver's side
LOCKING WITH KEY

LPD3048

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as shown.

Manual
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front
of the vehicle O1 . To unlock, turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle O2 .

LPD3049
Selective open (if so equipped)
The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time.
Turning the key toward the front O1 of the
vehicle locks all doors.
Turning the key one time toward the rear
O2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. From
that position, returning the key to neutral
O3 (where the key can only be removed
and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors
O4 .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

LPD3041
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the lock position O1 ,
then close the door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position
O2 .

LPD2309
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front passen-
ger's side) to the lock position O1 . When
locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front pas-
senger's side) to the unlock position O2 .

Lockout protection
When any door is open and the power door lock switch is moved to the lock position, all doors will lock. If the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle after all the doors are closed, all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
· Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)
All doors unlock automatically when the transmission is placed in the P (Park) or OFF position.
· Manual transmission (if so equipped)
All doors unlock automatically when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The automatic door unlock function can be changed using the "Vehicle Settings" of the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® SYSTEM (if so equipped)

SPA2037
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the unlock position O2 ,
the door can be opened from the outside or the inside.
When the lever is in the LOCK position O1 ,
the door can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING
· Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
· The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks using the remote control function or pushing the request switch (if so equipped) on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key.

CAUTION
· Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle.
· Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key under the following operating conditions:
· When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.
· When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, or a CB radio.
· When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.
· When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby.
· When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer.
· When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery's life is approximately two years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (if so equipped) will blink green for about 30 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
When the battery is discharged, firmly apply the foot brake and touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key. Then push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sound. For additional information, see "Push-button ignition switch" (P. 5-13).
For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-22).

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
· Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.
· Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
· Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object.
· Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
· Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
· If the outside temperature is below 14°F (-10°C) the battery of the Intelligent Key may not function properly.

· Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
· Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.
· Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm) from each request switch (if so equipped)
O1 .
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches (if so equipped) may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch (if so equipped) to lock/unlock the doors.

LPD3043
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request
switch (if so equipped) O1 .
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.

LPD2554
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION
· Do not push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
· After locking with the door handle request switch (if so equipped), verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

· To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors.
· Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped). The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

LPD3039
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) within the range of operation.

LDI3699
Locking doors
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push any door handle request switch
(if so equipped) O1 while carrying the
Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors will lock.
5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and the outside buzzer sounds twice.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2165
NOTE:
· Doors lock with the door handle request switch (if so equipped) while the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position.
· Doors do not lock by pushing the passenger door handle request switch (if so equipped) while any door is open. However, doors lock with the mechanical key even if any door is open.

· Request switches (if so equipped) for all doors can be deactivated when the Ext. Door Switch feature is switched to OFF using the "Vehicle Settings" menu in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).
· Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch (if so equipped) with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.
WARNING
After locking the doors using the request switch (if so equipped), make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may decrease the safety and security of your vehicle.

CAUTION
· When locking the doors using the request switch (if so equipped), make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch (if so equipped) to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.
· The request switch (if so equipped) is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key.
When the driver's side door is open, the doors are locked and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed; the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch (if so equipped) to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions: · When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel. · When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the rear parcel shelf. · When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin. · When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the door pockets. · When the Intelligent Key is placed on
or under the spare tire area. · When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors

LDI3699

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch
(if so equipped) O1 .

3. The hazard indicator lights flash once and the outside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch
(if so equipped) O1 again within 5 sec-
onds to unlock all doors.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2165
NOTE:
Request switches (if so equipped) for all doors can be deactivated when the Ext. Door Switch feature is switched to OFF using the "Vehicle Settings" menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch (if so equipped).
· Opening any door.
· Pushing the ignition switch.
Using the interior light
The interior light illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the interior light switch is not in the OFF position.
The light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:
· Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
· Locking the doors with the remote control.
· Switching the interior light switch to the OFF position.
· Switching the Auto Room Lamp feature to the OFF position in the "Vehicle Settings" menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).
For additional information, see "Interior lights" (P. 2-70).

LPD3047
Opening the trunk lid
1. Unlock all doors.
2. Push the trunk opener switch (if so
equipped) OA while carrying the Intelli-
gent Key with you.
3. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound four times.
4. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk, a chime will sound and the doors will unlock.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function may not function under the following conditions: · When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range. · When the doors or the trunk are open or
not closed securely. · When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Type A (if so equipped)

(lock) button

(unlock) button

(trunk) button

(panic) button

LDI3700

Type B (if so equipped)

LDI3701

(remote engine start) button

(lock) button

(unlock) button

(trunk) button

(panic) button

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the Key.

button on the Intelligent

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and the horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

WARNING
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may decrease the safety and security of your vehicle.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Unlocking doors

1. Press the

button on the Intelligent

Key to unlock the driver's door.

2. The hazard indicator lights flash once and the driver's door unlocks.

3. Press the

button again within 60

seconds to unlock all doors.

NOTE:
The Selective Unlock feature can be changed using the "Vehicle Settings" menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).
All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the
button:
· Opening any doors.
· Pushing the ignition switch.

Using the interior light
The interior light illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the interior light switch is not in the OFF position.

The light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:
· Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
· Locking the doors with the remote control.
· Switching the interior light switch to the OFF position.
· Switching the Auto Room Lamp feature to the OFF position in the "Vehicle Settings" menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).
For additional information, see "Interior lights" (P. 2-70).

Releasing the trunk lid

Press the

button for longer than 0.5

seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunk

release button will not operate when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the
button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
· It has run for a period of time.
· Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
· The request switch (if so equipped) on the driver or passenger door is pushed and the Intelligent Key is in range of the door handle.

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the answer back horn feature

can be deactivated using the Intelligent

Key. When it is deactivated and the

button is pressed, the hazard indicator

lights flash twice. When the

button is

pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights

nor the horn operates.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

NOTE:
If you change the Answer Back Horn and light flash feature with the Intelligent Key, the vehicle information display screen will show the current mode after the ignition switch has been cycled from the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle information display screen can also be used to change the answer back horn mode. For additional information, see "Vehicle Settings" (P. 2-25).

To deactivate:

Press and hold the

and

buttons

for at least 6 seconds. The hazard indica-

tor lights will flash three times to confirm

that the answer back horn feature has

been deactivated.

To activate:

Press and hold the

and

buttons

for at least 6 seconds once more. The haz-

ard indicator lights will flash once and the

horn will sound once to confirm that the

horn beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

LPD3342
Intelligent Key button operation light
The light blinks only when you press any button on the Intelligent Key. The light illumination only signifies that the key fob has transmitted a signal. You may look and/or listen to verify that the vehicle has performed the intended operation. The number of blinks identifies each registered key (i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) for your own identification purposes.

If the light does not blink, your battery may be too weak to communicate to the vehicle. If this occurs, the battery may need to be replaced. For additional information regarding the replacement of a battery, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-22).
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.
For additional information, see "Troubleshooting guide (Continuously Variable Transmission only)" (P. 3-17) and "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continuously Variable Transmission only)

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.

Symptom

When stopping the engine

The Shift to Park warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.

When opening the driver's door to get out of the vehicle

The Door/Trunk Open warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The No Key Detected warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.

When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle

The Rear Door Alert (if so equipped) warning message appears on the display, the horn sounds three times twice, or a Check Back Seat For All Articles (if so equipped) warning appears on the display.

The Shift to Park warning appears on the display and the outside chime sounds continuously.

Possible Cause The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. The ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or ON position.
The ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or ON position.
The Rear Door Alert is activated.
The ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.

Remedy Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Check the back seat for all articles, press the OK button to clear the Rear Door Alert warning message.
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Symptom

When closing the door with the inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds and all the doors unlock.

When pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) or the
button on the Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately 2 seconds.

When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine
When pushing the ignition switch

The Key Battery Low indicator appears on the display.
The No Key Detected warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.
The I-Key System Error warning message in the vehicle information display appears.

Possible Cause

Remedy

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-22).

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

It warns of a malfunction with the Intel- It is recommended that you visit a

ligent Key system.

NISSAN dealer.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)

LPD2995

The

button will be on the NISSAN

Intelligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote

Engine Start. This feature allows the engine

to start from outside the vehicle.

The following features may be affected when the Remote Engine Start feature is used:
· Vehicles with a manual climate control system (if so equipped) will default to the last used heating or cooling mode.

· Vehicles with an automatic climate control system (if so equipped) may default to either a heating or cooling mode depending on outside and cabin temperatures. For additional information, see "Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control" (P. 4-25).
Laws in some local communities may restrict or prohibit the use of Remote Engine Start, or the amount of time a parked vehicle engine may idle. For example, some laws require a person using Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in view or may restrict idling time except in freezing temperatures. Check local regulations for any requirements.
Other conditions may affect the function of the Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, see "Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work" (P. 3-21).
Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key® system" (P. 3-7).

REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING RANGE
WARNING
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
· Do not use Remote Engine Start in closed spaces such as a garage. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

CAUTION

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave sources are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The Remote Engine Start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the vehicle.
The Remote Engine Start operating range is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE

To use the Remote Engine Start feature to start the engine perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the

button to lock all doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the

button until the turn signal lights

flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the

vehicle is not within view press and hold

the

button for at least 2 seconds.

The following events will occur when the engine starts:
· The parking lights will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
· The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on.
· The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for an additional 10 minutes. For additional information, see "Extending engine run time" (P. 3-20).
Press and hold the brake then push the push-button ignition switch to the ON position before driving. For additional information, see "Driving the vehicle" (P. 5-19).
EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
The Remote Engine Start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps listed in "Remote starting the vehicle" in this section. Run time will be calculated as follows:
· The first 10 minute run time will start when the Remote Engine Start function is performed.
· The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the Remote Engine Start function is performed again. For example,

if the engine has been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the engine will run for a total of 15 minutes.
· Extending engine run time will bring you to the two Remote Engine Start limit.

A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, are allowed between ignition cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position and then back to the OFF position before the Remote Engine Start procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE START

To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform one of the following:

· Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and

press

until the parking lights turn off.

· Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

· Cycle the ignition switch on and then off.

· The extended engine run time has expired.

· The first 10 minute timer has expired.

· Opening the engine hood.

· Shifting the vehicle out of P (Park).

· The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

· Pushing the ignition switch without the Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
· Not pressing the brake pedal while pressing the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE START WILL NOT WORK

The Remote Engine Start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present:

· The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

· The hood is not securely closed.

· The hazard indicator lights are on.

· The engine is still running. The engine must be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off. This is not applicable when extending engine run time.

· The

button is not pressed and held

for at least 2 seconds.

· The

button is not pressed and held

within 5 seconds of pressing the lock

button.

· The brake is pressed.

· The doors are not closed and locked.
· The trunk is open.
· The I-Key System Error warning shows in the vehicle information display.
· The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.
· Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, have already been used.
· The vehicle is not in P (Park).
· There is a detected registered key already inside of the vehicle.
· The Remote Engine Start function has been switched to the OFF position in "Vehicle Settings" of the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).
The Remote Engine Start may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

HOOD

TRUNK LID

1. Pull the hood lock release handle O1 lo-
cated below the driver's side instrument panel until the hood springs up slightly.
2. Locate the lever O2 under the hood and
push the lever sideways with your fingertips.
3. Raise the hood O3 .
4. Remove the support rod and insert it
into the slot O4 .
Hold the coated parts when removing or resetting the support rod. Avoid direct contact with the metal parts, as they may be hot immediately after the engine has been stopped.

LPD3042
When closing the hood, return the support rod to its original position, lower the hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch and release it. This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.
WARNING
· Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.
· If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING
· Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, see "Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)" (P. 5-4).
· Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.

LPD3067
KEY OPERATION (if so equipped)
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

OPENER OPERATION

LPD2215

WARNING

· Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, see "Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)" (P. 5-4).

· Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.
The trunk lid release is located on the floor to the left of the driver's seat.
To open the trunk lid, pull the opener lever up.
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

LPD3044
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk.
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illuminated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light.
The handle is located inside the trunk compartment on the trunk lock at the center of the trunk lid.
INTERIOR TRUNK ACCESS (if so equipped)
The trunk can be accessed from the driver's side or the passenger side of the rear seat.
1. Move the front seat to the most forward position.
2. Pull up on the knob on the rear seatback.
3. Fold down the driver's or passenger's side seatback.
For additional information, see "Seats" (P. 1-2).

WARNING
· Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.
· Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
· When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
· Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

LPD3038
OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located below the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuelfiller door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

LPD3037

WARNING

· Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

· Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

· Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has

a built-in safety valve needed for

proper operation of the fuel system

and emission control system. An in-

correct cap can result in a serious

malfunction and possible injury. It

could also cause the

Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) to come on.

· Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.

· Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers:

Always place the container on the ground when filling.

Do not use electronic devices when filling.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it.
Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

· Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. For additional information, see "Fuel recommendation" (P. 10-4).

· The Loose Fuel Cap warning will

appear if the fuel-filler cap is not

properly tightened. It may take a few

driving trips for the message to be

displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-

filler cap properly after the Loose

Fuel Cap warning appears may cause

the

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to illuminate.

· Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the

Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to illu-

minate. If the

light illuminates

because the fuel-filler cap is loose

or missing, tighten or install the cap

and continue to drive the vehicle. The

light should turn off after a few

driving trips. If the

light does not

turn off after a few driving trips, have

the vehicle inspected. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

· For additional information, see "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" (P. 2-20).

· If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

LPD3051
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
O1 while refueling.
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

STEERING WHEEL

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
3. Press the reset button OA for more than
1 second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message after the fuel cap has been tightened.
LIC4233
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message (if so equipped)
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message displays in the trip computer when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. To turn off the warning message, perform the following: 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
previously described as soon as possible.

WARNING
· Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
· Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver's air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

SUN VISORS

3. Slide the sun visor extension O3 in or out
as needed.
CAUTION
· Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position.
· Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward.

LPD3045
TILT AND TELESCOPIC OPERATION
Push the lock lever O1 down:
· Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
direction O2 to the desired position.
· Adjust the steering wheel forward or
backward in direction O3 to the desired
position.
Pull the lock lever O1 up firmly to lock the
steering wheel in place.

WPD0315
1. To block glare from the front, swing
down the sun visor O1 .
2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side O2 .

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MIRRORS

SPA1733
VANITY MIRROR
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover.

LPD2471
CARD HOLDER (driver's side only)
To access the card holder, pull the sun visor
down and slide card in the card holder OA .
Do not view information while operating the vehicle.

WPD0126
REARVIEW MIRROR
The night position O1 reduces glare from
the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
Use the day position O2 when driving in
daylight hours.

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

LPD2452
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To operate the outside mirror remote con-
trol move the small switch O1 to select the
right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the
desired position using the large switch O2 .
Move the small switch to the center (neutral) position to prevent accidentally moving the mirror.

WARNING
· Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
· Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

LPD2216
Manual folding outside mirrors
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defog, defrost or de-ice for improved visibility. Push the rear window defroster switch to activate the heating function. Push the switch again to deactivate, or the heating function will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MEMO
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner's Manual

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Control panel buttons (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

How to use the touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

How to use the

MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

(brightness control) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

How to use the VOL (volume) knob /

PUSH

(power) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Selecting menu from launch bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Difference between predicted and

actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

How to park with predicted course

lines (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

How to turn on and off predicted

course lines (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-14

System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Heater and air conditioner (manual)

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 iPod®* player operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Bluetooth® streaming audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . 4-45
Antenna (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Antenna (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 Roof Mounted Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48 Operating Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System . . . . . . . . . 4-50 Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56 Phone display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58

Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60 Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60 Bluetooth® connections screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Phone and text message settings . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
iPod®/iPhone® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66

NISSANCONNECT® OWNER'S MANUAL (if so equipped)

· Other settings · Voice recognition · General system information

LHA5709
Refer to the digital NissanConnect® Owner's manual using the QR code on this page, or your printed NissanConnect® Owner's manual (if so equipped). This manual includes the following information: · NissanConnect® Services (if so equipped) · Audio system · Apple CarPlay® · Android AutoTM · Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system · Viewing information
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING
· Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.
· Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock.
· Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.
· In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (if so equipped)

* For additional information, see "Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System" (P. 4-50) regarding the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control button.
When you use this system, make sure the engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not running for a long time, it will discharge the battery, and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
"Example" -- Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display. These keys can be selected by touching the screen.

MENU button

2. Display screen

3. DISP button

BACK button

LHA4703

5. TUNE·SCROLL knob/PUSH SOUND button

6. VOL (volume) knob/PUSH button

(power)

(brightness control) button

button*

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN
CAUTION
· The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the glass screen breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could result in an injury.
· To clean the display, never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the panel.
· Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be "grayed out" or muted.
WARNING
· ALWAYS give your full attention to driving.
· Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you. If distracted, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
Touch-screen operation

LHA4700

Menu Item Selecting the item
Adjusting the item
Inputting characters 123 OK

Result

Touch an item to select. To select the "Phone" key, touch the "Phone" key on the screen. Touch the " return to the previous screen.

" key to

Touch the "+" key or the "-" key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.

Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.

Touch to manually enter numbers.

Completes the character input.

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen.

LHA4706

HOW TO USE THE BUTTON

To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle:

1. Press the

MENU button.

2. Touch the "Settings" key.

3. Touch the desired item.

LHA4700

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Settings

Menu item
Connections
Phone Sound Volume & Beeps Clock
On-screen Clock Clock Format Daylight Savings Time Set Clock Manually System Voice Camera Others
Display
Language OSS Licenses Return All Settings To Default

Result Touch to change the following settings. Touch this key to select either Bluetooth® phone, Bluetooth® audio or USB audio options. For additional information, see "USB connections screen" (P. 4-37) and "Bluetooth® connections screen" (P. 4-63). For additional information, see "Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System" (P. 4-50). For additional information, see "Audio system" (P. 4-27). For additional information, see "Volume & beeps" (P. 4-66). Touch this key to adjust clock settings. Touch to toggle ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen. Touch to set the clock to 12hour or 24hour format. Touch to adjust the daylight savings time to on or off.
Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the minutes. For additional information, see "Settings" (P. 4-58). Touch this key to change the camera settings. Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear. Touch this key to toggle the display off or to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional information, see "Adjusting the screen" (P. 4-13). Touch this key to change the language on the display. Touch this key to display software licensing information. Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

(brightness control) BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press the button. Pressing the button again will
change the display to the day or the night display.

Press and hold the

button for more

than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press

the button again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume) KNOB / PUSH (power) BUTTON
Press the PUSH (power) button to turn audio function on and off. Turn the VOL (volume) knob to adjust audio volume.

LHA4707
SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH BAR
Various system functions can be accessed by touching the items on the Launch Bar
O1 which is displayed on most of the main
menu screens (the Launch Bar does not appear on some screens such as keyboard screens, camera screens, etc.)

Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to display the corresponding menu screens.
The following menu items are available on the Launch Bar: · AM · FM · USB/iPod · Bluetooth · AUX · Settings

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

REARVIEW MONITOR

1. CAMERA button 2. DISP button
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA6425

WARNING
· Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.
· RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly.
· The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
· The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active.
LHA5234
To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just
above the vehicle's license plate O1 .
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

LHA4805
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with refer-
ence to the vehicle body line OA are dis-
played on the monitor.

Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
· Red line O1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) · Yellow line O2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) · Green line O3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m) Vehicle width guide lines O4
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
Predicted course lines (if so equipped) O5
Indicate the predicted course when backing up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.
The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA5283
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

LHA5284
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

LHA4995
Backing up near a projecting object
The predicted course lines OA (if so
equipped) do not touch the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

object when backing up to the position OA
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES (if so equipped)

LHA5285
Backing up behind a projecting object
The position OC is shown farther than the position OB in the display. However, the position OC is actually at the same distance as the position OA . The vehicle may hit the

WARNING
· If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
· On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line.
· If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:
Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.
Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.
· When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the AUTO ACC position, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

LHA5043
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
on the screen OA when the shift lever is
moved to the R (Reverse) position.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
the vehicle width guide lines OD parallel to the parking space OC while referring
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

LHA4770
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted
course lines OB enter the parking space OC .

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

LHA5047

For vehicles with CAMERA button

1. While on the main menu screen, touch the "Settings" key.

2. Touch the "Camera" key.

3. Touch the "Display Settings" key.

4. Touch the "Brightness", "Contrast", Tint", "Color", or "Black Level" key.

5. Adjust the item by touching the "+" or "" key on the touch-screen display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

For vehicles with DISP button
1. While on the main menu screen, touch the "Settings" key.
2. Touch the "Camera" key.
3. Touch the "Brightness", "Contrast", Tint", "Color", or "Black Level" key.
4. Adjust the item by touching the "+" or "" key on the touch-screen display.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving.
HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF PREDICTED COURSE LINES (if so equipped)
To toggle on and off the predicted course lines while in the P (Park) position:
1. Press the CAMERA button.
2. Touch the "Predicted Course Lines" key to turn the feature on or off.
To toggle on and off the predicted course lines while in the R (Reverse) position, press the CAMERA button.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
· The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show every object.
· Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bumper or on the ground.
· Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.
· Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.

· Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade.
· Make sure that the trunk is securely closed when backing up.
· Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate.
· When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
· Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:
· When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects.
· When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

· Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.
· The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
· The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.
· Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment.
· There may be a delay when switching between views.
· If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
· Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

LHA5234

CAUTION
· Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
· Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera O1 , the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

VENTS

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (manual) (if so equipped)

SAA3126
Side vents Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by opening, closing or rotating.

LHA5224
Center vents Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by moving the slide as indicated.

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING
· The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
· Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
· Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
NOTE:
· Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.
· When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

CONTROLS

1. Air flow control dial

2. A/C (air conditioner) button

Fan speed control dial

Air recirculation button

LHA4202

5. Temperature control dial

Fresh air intake button

Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch

Fan speed control dial

The

fan speed control dial turns the

fan on and off and controls fan speed.

Air flow control dial
The air flow control dial allows you to select the air flow outlets.
-- Air flows from center and side vents.
-- Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.
-- Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.
-- Air flows from defroster outlets and the foot outlets.
-- Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

Fresh air intake

Press the

fresh air intake button to

draw outside air into the passenger

compartment.

Air recirculation

Press the

air recirculation button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.

The air recirculation cannot be activated

when the air conditioner is in the

front

defrosting mode.

A/C (air conditioner) button

Start the engine, turn the

fan speed

control dial to the desired position and

press the

button to turn on the air

conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,

press the

button again.

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, see "Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch" (P. 2-44).

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost outlets.

1. Press the

button for normal heat-

ing. The indicator light on the

but-

ton will go off.

2. Turn the airflow control dial to the position.

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side and center vents.

1. Press the

button. The indicator light

on the

button will go off.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the position.

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the position.

2. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

· To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-

dows, turn the

fan speed control dial

to the right and the temperature control

to the full HOT position.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the foot outlets.

1. Press the

button. The indicator light

on the

button will go off.

2. Turn the airflow control dial to the position.

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the position.

2. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

· If in the

mode for more than 1

minute, the air conditioning system will

continue to operate until the vehicle is

shut off. This dehumidifies the air which

helps defog the windshield. The

mode automatically turns off, allowing

outside air to be drawn into the passen-

ger compartment to further improve the

defogging performance.

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the

fan speed

control dial to the desired position, and

press the

button to activate the air

conditioner. When the air conditioner is on,

cooling and dehumidifying functions are

added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the

button.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the position.

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4. Press the

button.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

· For quick cooling when the outside tem-

perature is high, press the

button.

The indicator light on the

button will

come on. Press the

button for nor-

mal cooling. The indicator light on the

button will go off.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the

button. The indicator light

on the

button will go off.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the position.

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4. Press the

button on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the position.

2. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

3. Press the

button. The indicator

light comes on.

When the

or positions in be-

tween are selected, the air conditioner au-

tomatically turns on. The air conditioning

system will continue to operate until the

fan speed control dial is turned to OFF or

the vehicle is shut off, even if the air flow

control dial is turned to a position other

than the

position. This dehumidifies

the air which helps defog the windshield.

The

mode automatically turns off, al-

lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas-

senger compartment to further improve

the defogging performance.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Operating tips
· Keep the windows closed while the air conditioner is in operation.
· After parking in the sun, drive for two or three minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
· The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately ten minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication.
· A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
· If the high temperature warning light illuminates in red indicating en-
gine coolant temperature is over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. For additional information, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-11).

AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation button should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4674

LHA4675

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

LHA4676
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4677

LHA4678
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic) (if so equipped)

1. Temperature control dial /AUTO button

Heated seat switches (if so

equipped)

3. Display Screen

Fan speed control dial/A/C

(air conditioner) button

LHA5218

Air recirculation button

Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch

(manual air flow control) button

Front defroster button

9. ON-OFF button

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature.
· The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
· A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.

· The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
· Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise, the system may not work properly.
· Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Press the

front defroster button on.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the maximum temperature to aid in defogging.

· To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, use the fan speed control dial to set the fan speed to maximum.

· As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode.

· When the

front defroster button is

pressed, the air conditioner will automati-

cally be turned on.

Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control (if so equipped)

Vehicles equipped with automatic climate controls and Remote Engine Start function may go into automatic heating or cooling mode when Remote Engine Start is activated depending on outside and cabin temperatures. During this period, the climate control display and buttons will be inoperable until the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. In Remote Engine Start defrosting mode, the rear window defroster and heated seats (if so equipped) may be activated automatically.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Turn the

fan speed control dial to

manually control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

Air recirculation

Press the

air recirculation button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.

A/C (air conditioner) button

Start the engine, turn the

fan speed

control dial to the desired position and

press the

button to turn on the air

conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,

press the

button again.

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Air flow control

Press the

button to manually control

air flow and select the air outlet.

-- Air flows from center and side vents.
-- Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.
-- Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
-- Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

To turn system off
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, press the ON-OFF button. Press the ONOFF button again, the system will turn on in the mode which was used immediately before the system was turned off.
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, see "Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch" (P. 2-44).
Heated seat switches (if so equipped)
For additional information, see "Heated seat switches" (P. 2-52).

LHA4125
OPERATING TIPS
The sunload sensor, located on the driver's side of the instrument panel, as shown, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.
· When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

AUDIO SYSTEM

· If you feel that the air flow mode you have

selected and the outlets the air is coming

out do not match, select the

mode.

· When you change the air flow mode, you may feel air flow from the foot outlets for just a moment. This is not a malfunction.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the earth's ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. For additional information, see "Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations" (P. 10-7).
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to service your "environmentally friendly" air conditioning system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

RADIO
When the ignition is placed in the AUTO ACC or ON position, press the PUSH
(power) button to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the ignition should be placed in the AUTO ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.
Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

are completely normal in a given reception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 30 mi (40 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position (usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter), static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics, AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur

for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
MP3 or WMA terms
· MP3 -- MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well-known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near "CD quality" sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn't hear.
· WMA -- Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality.

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

· Bit rate -- Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.
· Sampling frequency -- Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second.
· Multisession -- Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media. Writing data once to the media is called a single session, and writing more than once is called a multisession.
· ID3/WMA Tag -- The ID3/WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Artist/ song title line on the display.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and trademarks in the United States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
· Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port.
· Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
· Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device. USB devices should be purchased separately as necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB devices. To format a USB device, use a personal computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB memory devices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some USB devices may not be supported by this system.
· Partitioned USB devices may not play correctly.
· Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear properly in the display. Using English language characters with a USB device is recommended.
General notes for USB use
· For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

Notes for iPod® use
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
· Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod® is connected properly.
· An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod®.
· An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation.
· An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
· Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on an iPod®.
· Large video files cause slow responses in an iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.
· If an iPod® automatically selects large video files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.

iPod®* player
· Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed properly on the vehicle center screen. We recommend using English or Spanish language characters with an iPod®.
· Large video podcast files cause slow responses in the iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover.
· If the iPod® automatically selects large video podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover.
· Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod® is connected properly.
· The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation.
· An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using the iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
· Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on the iPod®.

· The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod®.
· If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation with Dock connector), do not use very long names for the song title, album name or artist name to prevent the iPod® from resetting itself.
· Be careful not to do the following, or the cable could be damaged and a loss of function may occur: Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40 mm) radius maximum). Twist the cable excessively (more than 180 degrees). Pull or drop the cable. Do not force the iPod® cable connector into the device port. Close the center console lid on the cable or connectors. Store objects with sharp edges in the storage where the cable is stored. Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.
· Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if the cable and/or connectors are wet. It may damage the iPod®.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

· If the cable and connectors are exposed to water, allow the cable and/or connectors to dry completely before connecting the cable to the iPod® (wait 24 hours for it to dry).
· If the connector is exposed to fluids other than water, evaporative residue may cause a short between the connector pins. In this case, replace the cable, otherwise damage to the iPod® and a loss of function may occur.
· If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, connectors cracked, contamination such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do not use the cable. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to replace the cable with a new one.
· When not in use for extended periods of time, store the cable in a clean, dust free environment at room temperature and without direct sun exposure.
· Do not use the cable for any other purposes other than its intended use in the vehicle.
*iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Bluetooth® streaming audio
· Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
· It is necessary to set up the wireless connection between a compatible Bluetooth® audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module before using the Bluetooth® audio.
· Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® audio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your audio device before using it with this system.
· The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped under the following conditions: Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Checking the connection to the handsfree phone.
· Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.

· While an audio device is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual.
· This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Panasonic.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

FM/AM RADIO
For additional information, see "Audio operation precautions" (P. 4-28).

MENU button

2. Display screen

LHA4704

SEEK button

TRACK button

BACK button

6. PUSH SOUND button/TUNE· SCROLL knob

7. VOL (volume) knob/PUSH button
8. AUDIO button

(power)

Audio main operation
VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power) button
Place the ignition switch in the AUTO ACC or ON position and press the PUSH
(power) button while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the PUSH (power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MENU button

Press the

MENU button to show the

Menu screen. Touch the "Settings" key on

the display, then touch the "Sound" key.

Sound

Bass Treble Balance

Fade

Speed Sensitive Volume

Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to "OFF" to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

Bass, treble, balance, fade and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching "-"/"+", "L"/"R", or "R"/"F" keys.

BACK button

Press the

BACK button to return to the

previous menu screen.

AUDIO button

Press to display the audio screen. When this button is pressed while the audio screen is not displayed, the last audio source played will play.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

AM/FM radio screen

LHA4708

1. "AM Menu" / "FM Menu" key Touch to display the radio menu screen.

2. "Direct Tune" (if so equipped) Touch to manually enter a station.

3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.

4. Reception information display Reception information currently available such as frequency, station name, etc. is displayed.

5. Preset list To listen to a preset station, touch the corresponding station from the preset list. If displayed, touch the " <" or " >" keys to scroll the preset list.

AM radio operation

Press the

MENU button and touch the

"AM" key or press the AUDIO button and

select AM on the bottom of the Launch Bar

to bring up the AM display screen.

If another audio source is playing when the "AM" key is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing.

AM Menu

Touch the "AM Menu" key to display the AM Menu screen options:

· SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the "AM Menu" key on the radio screen and then touch the "SCAN" key. The stations will be turned from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting station for several seconds. Touching the "SCAN" key again during this period of several seconds will stop tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.

· Refresh: Touch the "Refresh" key to update the station list displayed on the right side of the AM Menu screen.

(SEEK/TRACK) buttons

Press the

buttons to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies

and to stop at the next broadcasting

station.

Direct Tune

Touch the "Direct Tune" key to display the Direct Tune menu and manually enter a station.

1 to 6 station memory operations

Up to six stations can be registered in the preset list.

1. Select the AM radio band.

2. Tune to the station you wish to store.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset numbers in the preset list.

The information such as frequency will be displayed on the preset list.

To select and listen to the preset stations,

press

on the steering wheel

briefly or touch a preferred station on the

preset list on the radio screen.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

FM radio operation

Press the

MENU button and touch the

"FM" key or press the AUDIO button and

select FM on the bottom of the Launch Bar

to bring up the FM display screen.

If another audio source is playing when the "FM" key is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on the screen during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.

FM Menu

Touch the "FM Menu" key to display the FM Menu screen options:

· SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the "FM Menu" key on the radio screen and then touch the "SCAN" key. The stations will be tuned from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting stations for several seconds. Touching the "SCAN" key again during this period of several seconds will stop tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.

· Refresh: Touch the "Refresh" key to update the station list displayed on the right side of the FM Menu screen.
· RDS Info: Radio station and song information can be displayed on the FM display screen.

(SEEK/TRACK) buttons

Press the

buttons to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies

and to stop at the next broadcasting

station.

1 to 12 station memory operations

Up to 12 stations can be registered in the preset list.

1. Select the FM radio band.

2. Tune to the station you wish to store.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset numbers in the preset list.

The information such as frequency will be displayed on the preset list.

To select and listen to the preset stations,

press

on the steering wheel

briefly or touch a preferred station on the

preset list on the radio screen.

Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation
Connecting auxiliary devices
Connect an AUX device into the AUX input jack located on the center console below the heater and air conditioner controls.
The AUX input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette player, CD player, MP3 player or phone.
Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in the audio input jack. If a cable with a mono plug is used, the audio output may not function normally.
Activation and playing
Turn on the AUX device. Connect an AUX cable to the AUX device and the AUX input jack. Select AUX mode from the audio source menu screen or by pressing the Source button on the steering wheel.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

LHA4709
AUX screen · Audio source indicator
Indicates that the AUX source is currently playing.
· "Volume Setting" keys Touch one of the keys to select the sound output gain from Low, Medium and High.
· AUX from Launch Bar Touch to change from another source to AUX.

Additional features
For additional information, see "iPod® player operation" (P. 4-39) regarding the iPod® player available with this system.
For additional information, see "USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port" (P. 4-36) regarding the USB connection port available with this system.
For additional information, see "Bluetooth® streaming audio" (P. 4-42) about the Bluetooth® audio interface available with this system.
Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of Labeling
Additional Obligation of Labeling
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and third parties.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTION PORT
1. Type-A

LHA6423

Connecting a device to the USB connection port

WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION
· To avoid damage and loss of function when using a USB device, note the following precautions.
· Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port.
· Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
· Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.
NOTE:
For best results, it is recommended to use manufacturer cables, which are sold separately. A USB Type-A to USB Type-C adapter (or vice versa) may be available; however, results may vary.

For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.
The USB port is located on the center console beneath the heater and air conditioner controls. Insert the USB device into the connection port.
When a compatible storage device is plugged into the connection port, compatible audio files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle's audio system.

LHA4711

USB connections screen

Press the

MENU button and touch the

"Connections" key or touch the "Settings"

key and touch the "Connections" key to

change USB settings.

· Auto Change Source Touch "ON" or "OFF" to change the audio source settings for USB memory devices or an iPod® connected through a USB cable.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

USB screen

LHA4710

1. "USB Menu" key Touch to switch to the USB Menu screen.

2. Track information Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.

3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.

4. USB operation keys Touch to control USB playback functions
5. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.
USB operation keys
Touch to control USB playback functions.

Keys

Description

Each time "

" key is

touched, the repeat mode

changes.

Touch to return to the beginning of the current track. Touch again to select the previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current track.

Touch to play the track.

Touch to pause the track.

Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track.

Each time "

" key is

touched, the random mode

changes.

USB memory device player operation

Activation and playing
Connecting the USB memory device into the port will start playing the USB memory.

USB memory device can also be played by touching the "USB" key on the Menu screen or by touching USB on the Launch Bar.

To pause playing the USB memory device

touch the "

" key. To resume playing,

touch the " " key.

Skipping tracks

To skip the tracks, press the

buttons on the control panel or touch the

" " or " " keys on the screen repeat-

edly until the preferred track is selected.

NOTE:

Depending on the condition, skipping to the previous track may require pressing the button or touching the key twice. Pressing the button or touching the key once may only restart the current track from the beginning.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Fast-forwarding/rewinding

To rewind or fast-forward the track, press

and hold the

buttons on the

control panel or touch and hold the "

or "

" keys on the screen.

Changing play mode Repeat mode

Touch the "

" key on the USB screen to

change the repeat mode.

The following modes are available:

All: Repeat all

1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder

1 Track: Repeat track

Random mode

Touch the "

" key on the screen to

change the random mode as follows:

" is not highlighted: Random off

" highlighted: Random on

USB menu
Touch the "USB Menu" key on the USB screen to display the USB Menu screen.

"Now Playing" key Touch to display the USB screen.

"Folder List" key

Touch to display the folder list. Touch an item on the list to select the folder. The subfolder or track list will be displayed. Select a sub-folder or track from the list.

"Album Artwork" Touch to run on/off the album artwork display on the USB screen.

LHA6423
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
1. Type-A
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

CAUTION
· Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port.
· Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
· Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.
NOTE:
For best results, it is recommended to use manufacturer cables, which are sold separately. A USB Type-A to USB Type-C adapter (or vice versa) may be available; however, results may vary.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the iPod® can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen, use

the USB connection port located on the center console below the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect the iPod®specific end of the cable to the iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the USB connection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via a USB connection, its battery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB connection port on the vehicle, then remove the cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
· iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware version 1.3.0 or later)
· iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware version 2.0.1 or later)
· iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware version 2.0.4 or later)

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

· iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)*
· iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware version 5.1 or later)
· iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware version 5.1 or later)
· iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later)
· iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
· iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
· iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0.4 or later)
· iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware version 1.0.2 or later)
· iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware version 1.1 or later)
· iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)
· iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)
· iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
· iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
* Some features of this iPod® may not be fully functional.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to the version indicated above.

LHA4724
iPod screen
1. "iPod Menu" key Touch to switch to the iPod Menu screen.
2. Track information Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.
4. Album artwork An image of the album artwork is displayed when available if the setting is turned on.

5. iPod® operation keys Touch to control iPod® playback functions
6. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.
iPod® operation keys
Touch to control iPod® playback functions.

Keys

Description

Each time "

" key is

touched, the repeat mode

changes.

Touch to return to the beginning of the current track. Touch again to select the previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current track.

Touch to play the track.

Touch to pause the track.

Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track.

Each time "

" key is

touched, the random mode

changes.

iPod® memory device player operation

Activation and playing

Connecting the iPod® to the vehicle via USB cable will activate the iPod® mode.

The iPod® can also be played by touching the "iPod" key on the Menu screen or by touching iPod on the Launch Bar.

Skipping tracks

To skip the tracks, press the

buttons on the control panel or touch the

" " or " " keys on the screen repeat-

edly until the preferred track is selected.

NOTE:

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

Fast-forwarding/rewinding

To rewind or fast-forward the track, press

and hold the

buttons on the

control panel or touch and hold the "

or "

" keys on the screen,

Changing play mode Repeat mode

Touch the "

" key on the iPod® screen

to change the repeat mode. The following

modes are available.

No text displayed: Repeat off

All: Repeat all

One: Repeat track

Random mode

Touch the "

" key on the screen to

change the random mode as follows.

" is not highlighted: Random off

" highlighted: Random on

iPod® Menu
Touch the "iPod Menu" key on the iPod® screen to display the iPod® Menu screen.

"Now Playing" key Touch to display the USB screen.

"Folder List" key (if so equipped)

Touch to display the folder list. Touch an item on the list to select the folder. The subfolder or track list will be displayed. Select a sub-folder or track from the list.

"Album Artwork" Touch to run on/off the album

key

artwork display on the USB

screen.

"Playlists" key "Artists" key "Albums" key

Touch to display the list according to the selected item.

"Songs" key

"Podcasts" key

"Genres" key

"Composers" key

"Audiobooks" key

"iTunes Radio" key

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the device can be connected to the vehicle's audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicle's speakers. For additional information, see "FM/AM radio" (P. 4-32).
NOTE:
For additional information regarding Bluetooth® Streaming Audio, refer to the cellular phone owner's manual.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Connecting procedure

LHA4726

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

Manual Connecting Procedure

1. Press the trol panel.

MENU button on the con-

2. Touch the "Connections" key on the screen.

3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the "Add New" key to connect a phone.

4. When a compatible phone is found a message with a PIN appears on the screen.

5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the connection.

6. To access the Bluetooth® settings menu

touch the "

" key on the Connections

screen. The following options are

available:

Menu Item Bluetooth
ON Favorite (Connection first) PIN

Result Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device. Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the "ON" key again. The indicator light will go off. Allows user to toggle "Phone" and "Audio" favorite settings on and off. Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

Automatic Connecting Procedure

If no phone is connected to the system,

press and hold the

button on the

steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.

After the prompt, speak "Add Phone", the system will announce "transferring to the add phone settings menu". The system will start the pairing procedure. When a compatible phone is found, a message with a

PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Bluetooth® phone to complete the connection process. For additional information, see "Bluetooth® connections screen" (P. 4-63).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

Bluetooth® screen

LHA4727

1. "BT Menu" key Depending on the Bluetooth® version supported by the connected device, either the "BT Menu" key or "Connections" key is displayed.

2. Track information Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.

3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.

4. Bluetooth® audio operation keys Touch to control Bluetooth® audio playback functions
5. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.
Bluetooth® operation keys
Touch to control Bluetooth® playback functions.

Keys

Description

Each time "

" key is

touched, the repeat mode

changes.

Touch to return to the beginning of the current track. Touch again to select the previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current track.

Touch to play the track.

Touch to pause the track.

Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track.

Each time "

" key is

touched, the random mode

changes.

Bluetooth® audio operation

The ability to pause, change tracks, fast forward, rewind, randomize and repeat music may be different between devices. Some or all of these functions may not be supported on each device.

NOTE:

Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device that is connected, it may not be possible to perform audio operations or a delay may occur before music is played back.

Activation and playing
A Bluetooth® audio device can be played by touching the "Bluetooth" key on the Menu screen or by touching Bluetooth on the Launch Bar.

To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio,

touch the "

" key. Touch the "

" key

to resume playing.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Changing folders

To change folders, touch the "BT Menu" key.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding

To fast-forward or rewind the track, press

and hold the

buttons on the

control panel or touch the "

" or "

keys on the screen.

Changing play mode Repeat mode

Touch the "

" key on the screen to

change the repeat mode.

Random mode

Touch the "

" key on the screen to

change the random mode.

NOTE:

Available repeat/random modes change depending on the connected device.

BT Menu
Touch the "BT Menu" key on the Bluetooth® audio screen to display the Bluetooth® audio menu screen.
The following items are available.

"Now Playing" key
"Current List" key (if so equipped)*
"Connections" key
"Folder List" key*

Touch to display the Bluetooth® audio screen.
A list of tracks in the currently selected folder is displayed.
Touch to display the connections screen.
Touch to display the folder list. Touch an item on the list to select the folder.

*: displayed only when available.

NOTE:

Depending on the connected device, the "BT Menu" key may not be displayed.

LHA4227

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL

SEEK/TRACK buttons

2. SOURCE switch

3. Volume control switch

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

ANTENNA (Type A) (if so equipped)

SOURCE switch
Push the SOURCE switch to change the mode in the following sequence:
AM FM USB/iPod®* Bluetooth® Audio* AUX* AM. * These modes are only available when compatible media storage is inserted into the device or connected to the system.
Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch to increase or decrease the volume.
SEEK/TRACK buttons
AM and FM · Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station and show a list of the preset stations. · Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to seek up or down to the next station.

iPod®
· Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number.
· Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward the track being played.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio
· Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to skip ahead or back to the next song.
USB
· Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number.
· Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward the track being played.

LHA4236
The rod antenna cannot be shortened, but can be removed. When you need to remove the antenna, turn the antenna rod counter-
clockwise OB .
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna
rod clockwise OA and hand tighten.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ANTENNA (Type B) (if so equipped) SIRI® EYES FREE

CAUTION
To avoid damaging or deforming the antenna, be sure to remove the antenna under the following conditions.
· The vehicle enters an automatic car wash.
· The vehicle enters a garage with a low ceiling.
· The vehicle is covered with a car cover.
· Always properly tighten the antenna rod during installation or the antenna rod may break during vehicle operation.

ROOF MOUNTED ANTENNA
The antenna is located on the rear part of the vehicle roof.
CAUTION
· A build-up of ice on the antenna can affect radio performance. Remove the ice to restore radio reception.
· When removing snow from the roof, do not apply strong force to the antenna. That may cause broken antenna and roof panel dent.
· When using a high pressure car wash, keep the high pressure nozzle away from the antenna. The seal may be deformed or damaged.
· The radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the radio signal. If possible, do not put cargo near the antenna.

Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant can

be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes Free

can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free mode to

reduce user distraction. In this mode, Siri

Eyes Free is available for interaction by voice

control. After connecting a compatible Apple

device by using Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free

can be activated from the

button on

the steering wheel.

Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

· Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as displaying pictures or opening apps, may not be available while driving.
· For getting best results, always update your device to the latest software version.
· Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly.

· For functions that can be used in Siri Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple website.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

REQUIREMENTS
Siri® is only available on the iPhone® 4S or later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S are not supported by the Siri® Eyes Free system. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about device compatibility.
Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please check phone settings.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be accessible from the lock screen. Please check phone settings.
For best results, always update your device to the latest software version.

LHA4733
OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE

1. Press

button for less than 1.5 seconds.

2. Speak your command and then listen to the Siri® Eyes Free reply.
After starting Siri Eyes Free, press the button again within 5 seconds of the end of the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend the session.

Example 1 Playing music

1. Press

button for less than 1.5 seconds.

2. Say "Play (artist name, song name, etc.)".

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. Your vehicle will automatically change to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode* when the music starts playing. Mode selection is determined by the phone.
* If the iPhone® is also connected with the USB cable.

If the audio track does not start playing automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try changing the track or audio source to resume playback.

NOTE:
For best results, use the native music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the iPhone®.

Example 2 Replying to text messages

1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected and "Show Notifications" of the iPhone® settings is enabled, the vehicle will display a notification for new incoming text messages.

2. After reading the message, press or

press and hold the

button to reply

using Siri Eyes Free.

3. After a beep sounds, say "Text message" or a similar command to reply using Siri Eyes Free.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom

Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot access Siri Eyes Free from switch on the steering wheel

Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system. Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting. Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.

Audio Source does not change automatically to iPod® or Bluetooth® Audio mode

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary.
For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade performance.
Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the steering wheel.

Play, pause, next track, previous track or play timer does not work

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.

Cannot hear any music/ audio being played back from a connected iPhone®

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Cannot receive text message notifications on the vehicle audio system

Check if "Send Notifications" is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like "My Car". Press the INFO button. Turn on "Show Notifications".

Cannot reply to text message notifications by Siri Eyes Free

After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Press the Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say "Text Message".

button for 1.5 seconds on the steering wheel for

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts.
WARNING
· A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving.
· If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
· If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
· Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules.
· Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
· Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.
· Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.
· For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
· Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
· If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the

LHA5307
in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the AUTO ACC or ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If your phone does not connect automatically to the system, consult the phone's owner's manual for details on device operation.
You can connect up to six different Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes.
· Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the invehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

· Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized or work properly. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions.
· You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions: Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area. Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area. Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
· When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person's voice during a call.
· Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.

· While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones.
· Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.
· For additional information, refer to the cellular phone owner's manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC's RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference and 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Panasonic.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USING THE SYSTEM
The system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. If the button is pressed before the initialization completes, the system will announce "There is no phone connected" and will not react to voice commands.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe the following:
· Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Keep all vents pointed away from the microphone and close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly.

· Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly.
· Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds.
· Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.
· For calling contacts by name, please say both the first and last name of the contact for better recognition.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,

press the

button located on the steer-

ing wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. After

the tone sounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted.

· If a command is not recognized, the system announces, "Please say or select a command from the displayed list." Make sure the command is said exactly as prompted by the system and repeat the command in a clear voice.
· If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say "Go back" or "Correction" any time the system is waiting for a response.

· You can cancel a command when the

system is waiting for a response by say-

ing, "Cancel" or "Quit." The system an-

nounces "Exit" and ends the Voice Recog-

nition session. You can also press and

hold the

button on the steering

wheel for 1.5 seconds at any time to end

the Voice Recognition session. Whenever

the Voice Recognition session is can-

celed, a double beep is played to indicate

you have exited the system.

· If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, push the (+ or -) volume control switches on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pressing the

button on the steering

wheel. After interrupting the system, wait

for a beep before speaking your command.

One Shot Call (if so equipped)

To use the system faster, you may speak

the second level commands with the main

menu command on the main menu. For

example, press the

button and after

the tone say, "Call Redial".

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

LHA4723
INDICATORS
When a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connec-
tion, indicators O1 for the phone and text
messaging are displayed on the top of the screen.

Indicator

Description
Indicates there are unread received messages.
Indicates the Bluetooth® device that is currently connected.
Indicates the strength of the signal the Bluetooth® device is receiving.
Indicates the amount of remaining Bluetooth® device battery.

LHA5734
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel.

VOICE COMMAND BUTTON

Press and hold the

button

for less than 1.5 seconds to initi-

ate the Voice Recognition session.

To exit the Voice Recognition ses-

sion press and hold the

for

less than 1.5 seconds. For addi-

tional information, see "Voice

prompt interrupt" (P. 4-53).

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

You can use the

button to

interrupt the system feedback

and give a command at once.

If an iPhone® is connected, Siri® can be accessed by pressing the
button for more than two seconds. For additional information, see "Siri® Eyes Free" (P. 4-47).

PHONE BUTTON

To answer an incoming call or to

end a call press the

button.

To reject a call press and hold the button.

LHA4726
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

Manual Connecting Procedure

1. Press the trol panel.

MENU button on the con-

2. Touch the "Connections" key on the screen.

3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the "Add New" key to connect a phone.

4. When a compatible phone is found a message with a PIN appears on the screen.

5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the connection.

6. To access the Bluetooth® settings menu touch the " " key on the Connections screen. The following options are available:

Menu Item Bluetooth
ON Favorite (Connection first) PIN

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

NOTE:

Some cellular phones may require you to accept certain permissions in order to enable features on your Bluetooth® system. During the Bluetooth® pairing process, please check your cellular phone's display for a pop-up with the request to grant phonebook access. Granting phonebook access permission will allow your contacts to be downloaded to the vehicle's Bluetooth® system. A pop-up may display on your cellular phone stating that the Bluetooth® system would like to access your contacts and call history. Please select "Allow" or Yes" to grant this permission.

Automatic Connecting Procedure

If no phone is connected to the system,

press and hold the

button on the

steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.

After the prompt, speak "Add Phone", the

system will announce "transferring to the

add phone settings menu". The system will

start the pairing procedure. When a com-

patible phone is found, a message with a

PIN appears on the screen. Operate the

Bluetooth® phone to complete the connec-

tion process. For additional information, see

"Bluetooth® connections screen" (P. 4-63).

VOICE COMMANDS

Voice commands can be used to operate

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Press and hold the

button for less

than 1.5 seconds to bring up the phone

command menu. The commands avail-

able are:

· Call <name>

· Dial <number>

· Recent Calls

· Read/Send Text (if so equipped)

· Siri® (if so equipped)

· Voice Assistant (if so equipped)

· Phonebook

· Quick Dial

· Redial

· Select Phone

· Add Phone

· Call <name> Mobile

· Call <name> Home

· Call <name> Office

· Call <name> Main

· Call <name> Other

· Settings

"Call <name>"
Speak this command to make a call to a contact that is stored in the phonebook. Say "Call" followed by a phonebook name to initiate a call. If the system does not recognize the name it will display a list of similar names. After the prompt, speak or touch an item number from the displayed list to place the call.
"Dial <number>"
Speak this command to make a call with a spoken phone number. After the prompt, say "Dial" followed by a 7 to 10 digit phone number. The system will repeat the number back. Say "Dial" to initiate the call or "Correction" to re-enter the phone number.
"Recent Calls"
The following commands are available under "Recent Calls":
· Incoming Calls Speak this command to list the last 20 incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the incoming call will be displayed.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call. Touch the "Next" key to move through the list of incoming calls.
· Outgoing Calls Speak this command to list the last 20 outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call was to an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the outgoing call will be displayed. When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call. Touch the "Next" key to move through the list of outgoing calls.
· Missed Calls Speak this command to list the last 20 missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the missed call will be displayed. When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call. Touch the "Next" key to move through the list of missed calls.

"Read Text/Send Text" (if so equipped)
Speak this command to access text messaging functions. For additional information, see "Text messaging" (P. 4-60).
"Phonebook through voice command"
Speak "Phonebook" to view a list of quick steps to access entries stored in the phonebook. Commands are organized by the phone number type selected in the cellular device. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone's owner's manual.
The following commands are available: · <Say a Contact Name> · <Say a Contact Name> Main · <Say a Contact Name> Home · <Say a Contact Name> Mobile · <Say a Contact Name> Office · <Say a Contact Name> Other
For additional information on manually selecting phonebook entries, see "Making a call" (P. 4-59).

"Quick dial"
Speak this command to access the Quick dial menu. After the prompt, speak or select an item number on the displayed list to place the call. For additional information, see "Making a call" (P. 4-59).
"Redial"
Speak this command to call the last number dialed. After the prompt, say "Redial" to dial the number of the last outgoing call. The system will display "Redialing <name/ number>". The name of the phonebook entry will be displayed if it is available, otherwise the number being redialed will be displayed.
"Select Phone"
Speak this command to access the Connections menu. For additional information, see "Bluetooth® connections screen" (P. 4-63).
"Add Phone"
Speak this command to access the Connections menu. For additional information, see "Bluetooth® connections screen" (P. 4-63).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

"Settings"
Speak this command to access the System Voice settings menu. The system will exit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one of the following options on the screen to change the settings.
· Beep Only for Opening Prompt By touching the "ON" key, the indicator light will illuminate, the system voice will turn off and only a tone will sound when the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System is activated. To turn the system voice back on, touch the "ON" key again, the indicator light will turn off.
· Best Match List When the system doesn't recognize a phonebook name or dial number, it will provide a list of similar sounding results. To turn this off, touch the "ON" key, the indicator light will turn off. To turn on, touch the "ON" key again, the indicator light will turn on.

LHA4705

PHONE DISPLAY SCREEN

The Phone screen can be displayed by

pressing the

button on the control

panel.

The following options are displayed:
· Quick Dial Displays the Quick Dial screen. For additional information, see "Quick dial" (P. 4-57).
· Phonebook Displays the Phonebook screen. For additional information, see "Making a call" (P. 4-59).

· Call History Displays the Call History screen. For additional information, see "Making a call" (P. 4-59).
· Dial Number Displays the Dial Number screen. For additional information, see "Making a call" (P. 4-59).
· Text Message Displays the received message screen. For additional information, see "Text messaging" (P. 4-60).
· Connections Displays the Connections screen. For additional information, see "Bluetooth® connections screen" (P. 4-63).
· Volume Displays the volume adjustment screen. For additional information, see "Volume & beeps" (P. 4-66).

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MAKING A CALL

To make a call press the

button on the

control panel. Touch an option from menu

screen:

· Phonebook Select a person and the phone number you wish to call from the phonebook. Depending on the device, the phonebook will be downloaded from the cellular phone automatically when it is connected. If the automatic download does not take place, the phone number must be transferred to the hands-free phone system from the cellular phone prior to using this method. For additional information, see "Phone and text message settings" (P. 4-64).

· Call History Select a phonebook name or phone number from the recent incoming, outgoing or missed calls tabs. Touch a phonebook name or phone number listed to initiate the call.
· Dial Number Enter the phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the screen. Touch the "OK" key on the screen to initiate the call.

For additional options to make a call, see "Voice commands" (P. 4-56).

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is received by the phone connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System, the call information is displayed on the control panel display.

Press the

button on the steering

wheel or touch the "

Answer" key on

the screen to accept the call. To reject the

call touch the "

Decline" key on the

screen.

If the user is not able to answer the call right away, touch the "Hold Call" key displayed on the screen. A message will be played for the caller: "I'm not able to take a call right now." The user may then accept the call when available or reject the call.

To reject a call, press and hold the button on the steering wheel.

DURING A CALL
While a call is active the following options will appear on the control panel display:
· Mute Touch this key to mute or unmute the system.
· Dial Number Touch this key to dial digits during the phone call.

· Use Handset

Touch this key to transfer the call to the

handset. To transfer the call back from

the handset to the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System, press the

but-

ton on the control panel then select the

"Transfer Hands-free" key on the screen.

· Switch Call

This option will only be available when a

second call is active.

If supported by the phone, the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

allows for call waiting functionality. If a

call is received while another call is al-

ready active, a message will be displayed

on the screen. Press the

button on

the steering wheel or touch the "

Answer" key on screen to accept the in-

coming call. Touch the "

Decline" key

on the screen to reject the second call.

While a call is active, press the

button

on the steering wheel to access addi-

tional options. Speak one of the following

commands:

· "Send Digits" Speak this command followed by the digits to enter digits during the phone call.

· "Switch call" Speak this command to hold the second call and switch back to the original call.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

ENDING A CALL

To end an active call, press the

button

on the steering wheel or touch the "

Hang up" key on the screen.

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING
· Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of "Text-to-Speech". Check local regulations before using this feature.
· Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of some of the applications and features, such as social networking and texting. Check local regulations for any requirements.
· Use the text messaging feature after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
· If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using the text messaging feature, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

NOTE:
This feature is automatically disabled if the connected device does not support the Message Access Profile (MAP). For additional information, refer to the phone's owner's manual for details and instructions.
NOTE:
Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check the phone's screen during Bluetooth® pairing. For some phones, you may need to enable `Notifications' in the phone's Bluetooth® menu for text messages to appear on the head unit. For additional information, refer to your phone's owner's manual. Text message integration requires that the phone support MAP (Message Access Profile) for both receiving and sending text messages. Some phones may not support all text messaging features. Please refer to www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility information, as well as your device's owner's manual.

The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface.
The availability of the text message function may vary depending on the cellular phone.
When the cellular phone connected to the vehicle receives a text message, a notification will appear on the control panel display. To check the message, touch the "Read" key. Touch the "Ignore" key to save the message to be checked later.
Access text messaging through the vehicles Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone or through the vehicles control panel.

Text messaging using Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (if so equipped)

Sending a text message (if so equipped)

1. Press and hold the

button on the

steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.

2. Say "Send Text" after the tone.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine the recipient of the text message. Choose from the following:
· Phonebook · Quick Dial · Incoming Calls · Outgoing Calls · Missed Calls · Dial
4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system prompts for which message to send. Nine predefined messages are available. To choose one of the predefined messages, speak one of the following after the tone:
· "Driving, can't text" · "Call me" · "On my way" · "Running late" · "Okay" · "Yes" · "No" · "Where are you?" · "When?"

Reading a received text message

1. Press and hold the

button on the

steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.

2. Say "Read Text" after the tone.

The display will show a list of 20 messages with the sender and delivery time. Touch the "Next" key on the screen to view all messages. To view a text message press the
button on the steering wheel and speak the number item list on the screen. The following options will be available:
· Play Speak this command to have the system say the message.
· Reply Speak this command to send a text message response to the sender of the text message.
· Call Speak this command to call the sender.
· Previous Speak this command to move to the previous text message (if available).
· Next Speak this command to move to the next text message (if available).

Siri® Eyes Free
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, it can also be used to create custom messages that are sent through the phone. For additional information, see "Siri® Eyes Free" (P. 4-47).
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE:
For Apple iPhones®, text messages can only be sent through Siri.

Text messaging using the control panel

Display received message list

1. Press the panel.

button on the control

2. Touch the "Text Message" key on the screen

3. Touch an item on the list to read or reply to the message.

Up to 100 messages can be stored in the message list.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

Received message screen
Touching the "Read" key on the incoming message notification screen or selecting a message from the message list will show the details of the received message on the display.
Available actions:
· Prev. Touch this key to read the previous message.
· Next Touch this key to read the next message.

· Play/Stop Touch the "Play" key to have the handsfree phone system read out the received message. Touch the "Stop" key to stop reading.
· Call If the sender of the message is registered in the phonebook, touch the "Call" key to make a call to the sender.
· Reply A reply message can be selected from the predefined list.

Sending a text message (if so equipped)

This function may not be supported depending on the cellular phone.

1. Press the panel.

button on the control

2. Touch the "Text Message" key on the screen.

3. Touch the "Create Message" key on the screen.

The following items are available:

To
Select Text Send

Available item Enter Number by Keypad Quick Dial Phonebook Call History

Action Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the "OK" key to confirm. Select a recipient from the quick dial list. Select a recipient from the phonebook. Select a recipient/phone number from call history. Touch to display a list of predefined text messages. Touch to send the message.

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4716
BLUETOOTH® CONNECTIONS SCREEN
1. " " (back) key 2. Bluetooth tab 3. Connections screen 4. "Add New" key 5. " " (settings) key 6. " " (info) key 7. " " (Bluetooth® Audio connection) key 8. " " (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System connection) key

Access the Connections screen to change

settings and view Bluetooth® information.

To access the Connections screen press

the

MENU button on the control panel.

Touch the "Connections" key on the screen

then select the Bluetooth tab.

The paired phone will be added to the list on the Bluetooth® connections screen.

Touching the name of another device on the list will switch the connected device.

" " (back) key

Touch the "

" key to go back to the

previous screen.

Connecting Bluetooth®
For additional information on connecting a cellular phone or device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, see "Connecting procedure" (P. 4-55).

NOTE:
Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

Bluetooth tab
This tab will display up to six Bluetooth® devices. If six devices are already connected, one of the devices must be deleted before another device can be connected.

"Add New" key
Touch the "Add New" key on the screen to connect a new Bluetooth® device. For additional information, see "Connecting procedure" (P. 4-55).

" " (Bluetooth® settings) key

Touch the "

" key on the screen to

display a list of options.

· Bluetooth Touch this key to turn the Bluetooth® connection on or off

· Favorite (Connection first) Touch this key to change which device will be connected first when multiple devices are connected to the vehicle. Turn the " " key on or off to make the device a favorite connection. Turn the " " key on or off to make the device a favorite connection.

· Pin Touch this key to customize the PIN code. Input a four digit number then touch the "OK" key. The new PIN will be set.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

" " (info) key

Touch the "

" key on the screen to

display the information of the cellular

phone or to delete the device.

Touch the "Delete" key to remove a paired device then select "Yes" when a message appears.

" " (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System connection) key

A list of connected devices will be displayed

on the screen. Touch the "

" key next

to the name to connect a device to the

Hands-Free Phone System. If the phone is

listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the

icon. Touch the key again to disconnect the

device. The device will not be removed

from the list. For additional information on

removing a device, see "

" (info) key

(P. 4-64).

" " (Bluetooth® Audio connection) key

A list of connected devices will be displayed

on the screen. Touch the "

" key next

to the name to connect a device to

Bluetooth® Audio. If the device is listed as a

favorite, a star will appear on the icon.

Touch the key again to disconnect the

device. The device will not be removed

from the list. For additional information on

removing a device, see "

" (info) key

(P. 4-64).

LHA4721

PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE SETTINGS

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System set-

tings can be changed according to the

user's preference. To access the "Phone"

settings menu press the

MENU but-

ton on the control panel. Touch the "Set-

tings" key then touch the "Phone" key.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The following options are available:

Quick Dial Phonebook Text Message
Notifications Automatic Hold

Menu Item Edit Delete All Download Entire Phonebook Auto Downloaded Text Message Text Message Ringtone Signature Auto Reply Auto Reply Text Message Driver Only Vehicle Ringtone

Result Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, see "Quick dial" (P. 4-57). Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial. All the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle are downloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone's owner's manual. Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected. Turns the text messaging function on/off. Turn the incoming message sound on/off. Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off. Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off. Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined messages. When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset. Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off. When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

iPod®/iPhone®

Volume & beeps

There are several methods to customize the volume settings.

Volume & Beeps

The Volume & Beeps screen can be found

by pressing the

MENU button on the

control panel, touching the "Settings" key

on the screen and selecting "Volume &

Beeps". To adjust the volume of the follow-

ing options, touch the "-" and "+" keys on the

screen.

The available settings are:
· Ringtone Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of incoming calls.
· Outgoing Call Adjust the volume level of the outgoing calls.

· Voice Prompt Vol. Adjust the volume level of the system voice.

· Text-to-speech Vol. Adjust the volume of the replay voice for text messaging.
· Button Beeps Turns on/off the button beep sounds and alarm for prohibited operations.

Volume Settings

The Volume settings screen can be found

by pressing the

button on the control

panel then touching the "Volume" key on

the screen. To adjust the volume of the

following options, touch the "-" and "+" keys

on the screen.

The available settings are:
· Ringtone Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of incoming calls.
· Outgoing Call Adjust the volume level of the outgoing calls.

"Made for iPod", "Made for iPhone" and "Made for iPad" mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone or iPad may affect wireless performance.
iPad, iPhone, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Ignition switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Continuously Variable Transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-12 Ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Push-button ignition switch (if so equipped) . . . . 5-13 Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-14 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Starting the engine (models without NISSAN Intelligent Key® system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Starting the engine (models with NISSAN Intelligent Key® system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-18
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-23
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 LDW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . . . 5-29 LDW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-33 BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-36 BSW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . . . 5-43 RCTA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

How to enable/disable the RCTA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51 Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51 Cruise control operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . . . . 5-53 How to select the cruise control mode . . . . . . 5-55 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76 RAB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77 Turning the RAB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79

RAB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-84 Turning the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-86 AEB with Pedestrian Detection system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-88 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) . . . 5-95 I-FCW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-98 Turning the I-FCW system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99 I-FCW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Intelligent Driver Alertness system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110

How to enable/disable the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . 5-119 Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122

Rear Sonar System (RSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122 System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123 How to enable/disable the sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125 Sonar limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128 Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-129 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
· Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
· Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
· Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
· Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
· If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.
· Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.
· Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time.
· Keep the rear vent windows, doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with one of these open, follow these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Turn the air recirculation mode off and set the fan speed control to the highest level to circulate the air.

· If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturer's recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.
· The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

5-4 Starting and driving

WARNING
· The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.
· Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.
CAUTION
· Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst's ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
· Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

· Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
· Do not race the engine while warming it up.
· Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check all your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
Starting and driving 5-5

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Additional information:
· When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.
· The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).
· The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
· The "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air" or "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.

· The "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display or the "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning appears in the trip computer when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air" or "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off.
· The "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air" or "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
· Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's operation and the outside temperature. Do not reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four tires.
· The Tire and Loading Information label is located in the driver's door opening.

· You can also check the pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the vehicle information display (if so equipped). The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen corresponds with the actual order of the tire position.
For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-18) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 6-3).
WARNING
· Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
· If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and

5-6 Starting and driving

could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (For additional information, see "Flat tire" (P. 6-3) for changing a flat tire.)
· When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
· Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION
· The TPMS may not function properly when the wheels are equipped with tire chains or the wheels are buried in snow.
· Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
· Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
· If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.
· If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases:
· If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and tire without TPMS.
· If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID has not been registered.
· If the wheel is not originally specified by NISSAN.
FCC Notice:
For USA: FCC ID: PAXPMVCA74
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-7

For Canada: Model: PMV-CA74
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference. (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position (if so equipped).
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine.

Operation:
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is reached, the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
· If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash three times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure. When the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once.
· If the hazard indicator does not flash within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not operating.

· The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill Tire Alert under the following conditions: If there is interference from an external device or transmitter. The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire. There is a malfunction in the TPMS. There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators. The identification code of the tire's pressure sensor is not registered to the system. The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low.
· If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward and try again.
If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.

5-8 Starting and driving

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the "Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.
· If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a "blow-out" can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspecting the tires for wear and damage. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-27). If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or "blows-out" while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide.
Starting and driving 5-9

The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
WARNING
The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury. · The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire. · Do not rapidly apply the brakes. · Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal. · Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire. For additional information, see "Changing a flat tire" (P. 6-4).
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don't mix! That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don't drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

5-10 Starting and driving

IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped)

WARNING
· Never remove the ignition key or place the ignition switch in the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

LSD3629
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.
· When placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position, make sure that the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
· When removing the key from the ignition switch (if it is inserted), make sure that the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Move the ignition switch slightly in the ON direction.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the ignition switch.
If the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK position, the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position.
The shift lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed.
There is an OFF position O1 between the
LOCK and ON positions. The OFF position is indicated by a "1" on the key cylinder.

Starting and driving 5-11

LSD3607
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)
The ignition switch includes a device that helps prevent accidental removal of the key while driving.
The key can only be removed when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, place the ignition switch in the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.
IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
OFF: (1)
The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel.
ON: Normal operating position (2)
This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories.
START: (3)
This position starts the engine. As soon as the engine has started, release the key. It automatically returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

5-12 Starting and driving

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped)

LSD2645
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed three consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.

When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal or the clutch pedal for manual transmission (M/T) models, the ignition switch position will illuminate as follows:
Push center:
· Once to change to ON.
· Two times to change to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be placed in the OFF position until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position (M/T).
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the OFF position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position (M/T).
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch position will change to the ON position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed in the meter. For additional information, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P. 2-12).

Starting and driving 5-13

WSD0165
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system's operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to turn the ignition switch to start the engine.
The operating range of the engine start
function is inside of the vehicle O1 .
· If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function.
· If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in this position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ON position while carrying the Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted in the port.
The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off.

OFF
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.
AUTO ACC
With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the Intelligent Key with you, and the ignition switch placed from the ON to the OFF position, the radio can still be used for a period of time, or until the driver's door is opened.
After a period of time, functions such as radio, navigation, and Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System may be restarted by pressing the POWER button/VOLUME control knob or the key fob unlock button. For additional information, see "Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems" (P. 4-2).
ON (Without cranking)
If the vehicle is in the ON position, it has a battery saver feature that will turn the ignition switch to OFF after 10 minutes.
The battery saver feature will be restarted if any of the following occur:
· The ignition switch changes position.
· The hazard lamps are operated

5-14 Starting and driving

ON (Normal operating position) This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.

LSD4813
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is discharged, or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the NISSAN Intelligent Key® as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds. The engine will start.
After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to ON.
NOTE:
· When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position or the engine is started by the above procedures, the NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light may blink in yellow (on the meter) even if the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To stop the warning light from blinking, touch the ignition switch with the NISSAN Intelligent Key® again.
· If the NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light in the meter is blinking in green, replace the battery as soon as possible. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-22)

Starting and driving 5-15

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
· Rapidly push the ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
· Push and hold the ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

· Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.
· Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake and clutch fluid (if so equipped), and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.
· Check that all windows and lights are clean.
· Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.
· Lock all doors.
· Position seat and adjust head restraints/ headrests.
· Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
· Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.
· Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. For additional information, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P. 2-12).

5-16 Starting and driving

STARTING THE ENGINE (models without NISSAN Intelligent Key® system)
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission models:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the OFF position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch.
The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the driving positions.
Manual transmission (M/T) models:
For best practice when operating an M/T, depressing the clutch before moving the shift lever is ideal.
Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the engine.
The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
· If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it and then crank the engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
· If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather.
NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

Starting and driving 5-17

STARTING THE ENGINE (models with NISSAN Intelligent Key® system)

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the driving positions.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and push the ignition switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position.
· If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
· If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to the LOCK position. After
5-18 Starting and driving

cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up:
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at a moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.
5. To stop the engine, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)
Vehicles started with the Remote Engine Start require the ignition switch to be placed in the ON position before the shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position. To place the ignition switch in the ON position, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.
2. Apply the brake.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON position.
For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-2).

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so equipped)
WARNING
· Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
· Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.
· Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.
· Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

CAUTION
· To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.
· Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.
NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle
WARNING
· Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
· Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.
· Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
· Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission
· Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.

Starting and driving 5-19

CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever into a driving gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.
4. Stop the vehicle completely before moving the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
The Continuously Variable Transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or AUTO ACC position or if the key is removed.
5-20 Starting and driving

Shifting
To move the shift lever:

LSD2643

Press the button OA while
depressing the brake pedal

Press the button OA to shift

Shift without pressing the
button OA
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever from P (Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or AUTO ACC position for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any drive position, the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position. If this occurs, perform the following steps:
1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stopped.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) to park the vehicle and place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
P (Park)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button pressed in to move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then place the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
R (Reverse)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. R (Reverse) speed is limited to 30 mph (48 km/h). Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) in the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button pressed in to move the shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
L (Low)
Use this position for engine braking on steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in any other circumstances.

Shift lock release

LSD2644

If the battery is discharged, the shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the foot brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift lever, perform the following procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and remove the key.

2. Apply the parking brake.

Starting and driving 5-21

3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a screwdriver, remove the shift lock release cover. · If available, a plastic trim tool can also be used.
4. Push down the shift lock release using a suitable tool.
5. Press the shift lever button OA and move
the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release.
6. Place the ignition switch in the ON position to unlock the steering wheel.
7. Release the parking brake.
The vehicle may be moved to the desired location.
Replace the removed shift lock release cover after the operation.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position, have the Continuously Variable Transmission system checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Drive sport mode
Drive sport mode switch

LSD3250

When the drive sport mode switch is pushed with the shift lever in the D (Drive) position, the drive sport mode indicator or the SPORT mode indicator light appears in the instrument panel. For additional information, see "Drive sport mode indicator" (P. 2-37) or "SPORT mode indicator light" (P. 2-24).

Use the drive sport mode when you need improved engine braking.

To turn off the drive sport mode, push the drive sport mode switch again. The drive sport mode indicator or SPORT mode indicator light will turn off.
Each time the engine is started, or when the shift lever is shifted to any position other than D (Drive), the drive sport mode will automatically turn off.
Accelerator downshift -- in D (Drive) position --
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the Continuously Variable Transmission will not be shifted into the selected driving position.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated.

5-22 Starting and driving

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is activated. For additional information, see "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" (P. 2-20). This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds. Then place the ignition switch back in the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have the transmission checked and repaired, if necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)
WARNING
· Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
· Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.
· Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Doing so may result in an accident due to loss of engine braking.
CAUTION
· Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch damage.
· Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting to help prevent transmission damage.
· Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse).

· When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running (for example, at a stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied.

Starting and driving 5-23

Shifting

SSD0535

To change gears, or when upshifting or downshifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then release the clutch slowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage could occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd, 4th and up to 5th gear in sequence according to vehicle speed.
On the manual transmission, you cannot shift directly from 5th gear into R (Reverse). First shift into N (Neutral), then into R (Reverse).
The shift lever ring returns to its original position when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral) position.
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1st gear, shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1st gear.
Suggested up-shift speeds
The following are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas (less than 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

GEAR CHANGE

mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd

9 (14)

2nd to 3rd

12 (19)

3rd to 4th

21 (34)

4th to 5th

28 (45)

5th

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas and high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th 5th

mph (km/h) 15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) 45 (72) --

5-24 Starting and driving

PARKING BRAKE

Suggested maximum speed in each gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

GEAR 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th

mph (km/h) 28 (46) 52 (83) 76 (122) 103 (166) --

WARNING
· Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.
· Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.
· Do not use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

WSD0169
To engage: Pull the parking brake lever
up OA .
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
Continuously Variable Transmission models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-25

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

3. While pulling up on the parking brake
lever slightly, press the button OB and
lower the lever completely.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

LSD3498
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.
· This system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road.
The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera
unit OA located above the inside mirror.
The LDW system warns the driver that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. For additional information, see "LDW system operation" (P. 5-27).

5-26 Starting and driving

Vehicle Information Display
LDW SYSTEM OPERATION

1 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indica-
tor or Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light
2 Vehicle Information Display or Trip
Computer
3 LDW Switch (if so equipped)
The LDW system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above and the lane markings are clear. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator (if so equipped) on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver.

LSD3988

Starting and driving 5-27

The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

Trip Computer
5-28 Starting and driving

LSD3989

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system.

For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped):

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver

Assistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Lane" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Lane Departure Warning" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

LSD4122

Starting and driving 5-29

5-30 Starting and driving

For vehicles with the LDW switch (if so equipped): 1. Push the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
switch to turn the LDW system on. 2. Push the LDW switch again to turn the
LDW system off. When the LDW system is turned on, the indicator light on the LDW switch illuminates.
LSD3991

LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.
· The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.
· Do not use the LDW system under the following conditions as it may not function properly:
During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow.
When driving on winding or uneven roads.
When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.

When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels).
When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle.
· The system may not function properly under the following conditions:
On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
On roads where there are sharp curves.

On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system could detect these items as lane markers.)
On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.
When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.
When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
Starting and driving 5-31

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then started, the LDW system may be deactivated automatically and the following message will appear in the vehicle information display (if so equipped): "Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature."
When the interior temperature is reduced, the LDW system will resume operating automatically.
The LDW system is not designed to warn under the following conditions:
· When you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.)
· When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).
After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The LDW indicator (orange) or LDW indicator light will illuminate in the instrument panel. If the LDW indicator (orange) or LDW indicator light illuminates in the instrument panel, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine/motor off and restart the engine/motor. If the LDW indicator (orange) or LDW indicator light continues to illuminate, have the LDW system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3502
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The lane camera unit OA for the LDW sys-
tem is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDW system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
· Always keep the windshield clean.
· Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

5-32 Starting and driving

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so equipped)
· Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's capability of detecting the lane markers.
· Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.
The BSW system uses radar sensors O1
installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

LSD3503
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death.
· The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system.

Starting and driving 5-33

SSD1030
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

5-34 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW indicator

LSD3541

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice), the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and the BSW indicator illuminates (yellow) in the vehicle information display. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, see "BSW driving situations" (P. 5-38).
The BSW system automatically turns on every time the engine is started, as long as it is activated using the settings menu on the vehicle information display.

Starting and driving 5-35

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM
5-36 Starting and driving

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver

Assistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Blind Spot" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Blind Spot Warning" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE:
· When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted.
· When the BSW system is turned on, the BSW indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.

LSD3507

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
· The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
· The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as:
Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
Oncoming vehicles.
Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop.
A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle.
A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.

A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.
A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
· The radar sensors' detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
· The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.

· The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
Severe weather
Road spray
Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle
· Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
· Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-37

Another vehicle approaching from behind
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.
NOTE:
· The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.

LSD2299
Illustration 1 Approaching from behind
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator on
Indicator off
Indicator flashing

LSD2300
Illustration 2 Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.

5-38 Starting and driving

NOTE:
· The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.
· If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2302
Illustration 3 Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds.

LSD2303
Illustration 4 Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.

Starting and driving 5-39

NOTE:
· When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
· The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.
· If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2305
Illustration 5 Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side.

LSD2308
Illustration 6 Entering from the side
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.

5-40 Starting and driving

NOTE:
· If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.
· The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

LSD3566
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The "Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Starting and driving 5-41

The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Malfunction
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.

NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3503
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors O1 for the BSW and
RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

5-42 Starting and driving

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA) (if so equipped)

Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05GHz 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA system could result in serious injury or death.
· The RCTA system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a parking space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system.
The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

Starting and driving 5-43

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
5-44 Starting and driving

LSD3540
The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space.

LSD2216

LSD3503
The RCTA system uses radar sensors O1
installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle.
The radar sensors O1 can detect an ap-
proaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft. (20 m) away.

Starting and driving 5-45

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM
5-46 Starting and driving

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Parking Aids" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Cross Traffic" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE:

When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

LSD3510

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

LSD3195
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

· Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:
Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles
A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h)
A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
· The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
Illustration OA : When a vehicle
parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.
Illustration OB : When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.
Illustration OC : When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.
Illustration OD : When an ap-
proaching vehicle turns into your vehicle's parking lot aisle.
Starting and driving 5-47

Illustration OE : When the angle
formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small
· The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
Severe weather
Road spray
Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle
· Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles
· Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

NOTE:

Illustration 1

LSD2043

In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.

Illustration 2

LSD2044

5-48 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The "Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by conditions such as ice, snow, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.
LSD3566
Starting and driving 5-49

Malfunction
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

5-50 Starting and driving

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.0524.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
Droit applicable: Canada 310
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Bandes de fréquences: 24.0524.25GHz
Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts

1 RES+ switch

LSD3131

2 CANCEL switch

3 SET- switch

4 CRUISE ON/OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL
· If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically.
· To properly set the cruise control system, use the following procedures.

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: · When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed. · In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed. · On winding or hilly roads. · On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
etc.). · In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.
CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is set. Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal and turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off immediately. Failure to do so may cause engine damage.

Starting and driving 5-51

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

CRUISE ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indica-

tor light or

indicator in the instrument

panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the SET

switch and release it. The SET indicator

light or

indicator in the instrument

panel comes on. Take your foot off the ac-

celerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the

set speed.

· To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.

· The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods:

· Push the CANCEL switch; the CRUISE indi-

cator light or

indicator in the instru-

ment panel goes out.

· Tap the brake pedal; the CRUISE indicator

light or

indicator goes out.

· Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch. The

CRUISE indicator light or

indicator in

the instrument panel goes out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled and the CRUISE indicator light or indicator in the instrument panel goes out if:
· You depress the brake pedal while pushing the RES+ or SET switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory.

· The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.
· You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
· Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET switch.

· Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
· Push and release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
· Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET switch and release it.
· Push and hold the SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed.
· Push and release the SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

5-52 Starting and driving

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) (if so equipped)
OA ICC switch

LSD3511

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or death.
· The ICC system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
· Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
· Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owner's Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle's speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

Starting and driving 5-53

· In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime will not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.
The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h).
The vehicle travels at a set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise control modes:
· Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: For maintaining a selected distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you up to the preset speed
· Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a preset speed

Push the ICC switch OA to choose the
cruise control mode between the vehicleto-vehicle distance control mode and the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.
Once a control mode is activated, it cannot be changed to the other cruise control mode. To change the mode, push the ICC
switch OA once to turn the system off. Then push the ICC switch OA again to turn the
system back on and select the desired cruise control mode.
Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.
For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, see "Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode" (P. 5-55).
For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, see "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" (P. 5-72).

5-54 Starting and driving

HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE CONTROL MODE
Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: To choose the vehicle-to-
vehicle distance control mode O1 , quickly push and release the ICC switch OA .

LSD3512
Selecting the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: To choose the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
O2 , push and hold the ICC switch OA for
longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional information, see "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" (P. 5-72).

LSD3513
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the ICC system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front of you according to that vehicle's speed (up to the set speed), or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The ICC system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.

Starting and driving 5-55

If the radar sensor O1 detects a slower
moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance.
The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of vehicle braking power) if necessary.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

5-56 Starting and driving

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE OPERATION

LSD3514
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you

and can reduce the speed to match a slower vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle's total braking power.
This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action.
The system will cancel and a warning chime will sound if the speed is below approximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected ahead. The system will also disengage when the vehicle goes above the maximum set speed.
For additional information, see "Approach warning" (P. 5-63).

The following items are controlled in the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
· When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).
· When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges a standstill with a warning chime.
· When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved out from its lane of travel, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.

SSD0254
When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.

Starting and driving 5-57

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed.
Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.

LSD3515
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE SWITCHES
The system is operated by the ICC switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel.
1. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed.

2. RES+ switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.
3. DISTANCE switch: Changes the vehicle's following distance: · Long · Middle · Short
4. ICC Switch: Master switch to activate the system.
5. SET- switch: Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally.

5-58 Starting and driving

LSD3546
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode display and indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.
1. This indicator indicates the ICC system status depending on a color:
· ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ICC is on.

· ICC system SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set.
· ICC system warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system.
2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.
3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you.
4. Set distance indicator:
Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the distance switch.

LSD3547
Operating vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
To turn on the cruise control, quickly push
and release the ICC switch OA . The ICC sys-
tem ON indicator (gray), set distance indi-
cator and set vehicle speed indicator OB
come on in a standby state for setting.

Starting and driving 5-59

LSD3548
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET
switch OC and release it. The ICC system
set indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and
set vehicle speed indicator OB will come on.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

LSD3549
When the SET switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set and the ICC indicators will blink for approximately 2 seconds:
· When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) and a vehicle ahead is not detected
· When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or Manual mode
· When the parking brake is applied
· When the brakes are operated by the driver

When the SET switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set.
A warning chime will sound and a message will pop up:
· When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push the ICC switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the ICC switch again.)
For additional information about the VDC system, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-119).
· When VDC is operating
· When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, make sure the wheels are no longer slipping.)

5-60 Starting and driving

LSD3550
1 System set display with vehicle ahead
2 System set display without vehicle ahead
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead
When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected distance.
NOTE:
· The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system.
· When the brake operates, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC system will also display the set speed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected
When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed.
When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.
If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle.
When a vehicle is no longer detected under approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the system will be canceled.

Starting and driving 5-61

LSD3551
When passing another vehicle, the set speed indicator will flash when the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

How to change the set vehicle speed

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following methods:
· Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.

· Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

· Turn the ICC

switch off. The ICC indi-

cators will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods:

· Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET switch.
· Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set vehicle speed will increase by approximately 5 mph (8 km/h for Canada).
· Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h for Canada).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods:
· Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET switch and release it.
· Push and hold the SET switch. The set vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 mph (8 km/h for Canada).
· Push, then quickly release the SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h for Canada).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).

5-62 Starting and driving

LSD3552

How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions.

Each time the distance

switch OA is

pushed, the set distance will change to

long, middle, short and back to long again,

in that sequence.

LSD2752

Distance Approximate distance at 60

1. Long 2. Middle 3. Short

mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)] 200 (60) 150 (45) 90 (30)

· The distance to the vehicle ahead will change according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance.

· The distance setting will remain at the current setting even if the engine is restarted.

Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:
· The chime sounds.
· The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.
The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:
· When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing.
· When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing.
· When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
The warning chime will not sound when:
· The vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.
· The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.

Starting and driving 5-63

NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the ICC sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when entering or exiting a curve. In these cases you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).
Automatic cancellation
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled:
· When the vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)
· When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill

· When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position, Manual mode.
· When the parking brake system is applied · When the VDC system is turned off · When VDC operates · When distance measurement becomes
impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor · When a wheel slips · When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. · The ICC system is primarily intended
for use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the ICC system in city traffic or congested areas.

· The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.
· As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
· If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges that the vehicle has come to a standstill and sound a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

5-64 Starting and driving

· Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances.
· The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under the following conditions:
On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves
On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.
During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the distance sensor
On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes)
On repeated uphill and downhill roads

When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration
Interference by other radar sources
· Do not use the ICC system if you are towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead.
· In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC system where not recommended in this warning section.
The radar sensor will not detect the following objects:
· Stationary and slow moving vehicles
· Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
· Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
· Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane
The sensor generally detects the signals returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflection from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not maintain the selected distance.

The following are some conditions in which the sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead and the system may not operate properly:
· When snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor's detection.
· When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.
· When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of your vehicle.
The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor's operation within the limitations of the system.
When the sensor is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect them. In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor regularly.

Starting and driving 5-65

The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead. A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead.
5-66 Starting and driving

SSD0252

When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the radar system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.

SSD0253
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

Starting and driving 5-67

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
5-68 Starting and driving

LSD3553

The following are conditions in which the ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set:
· When the VDC system is turned off
· When the VDC operates
· When a vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)
· When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill
· When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or Manual mode.
· When the parking brake is applied
· When a wheel slips
· When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted

Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system.
Condition B
When there is inclement weather (rain. fog. snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the ICC system will automatically be canceled, the chime will sound and the "Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle information display and the system will operate normally. If the "Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition C
When the radar sensor area of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is obstructed, the ICC system will automatically be canceled.
The chime will sound and the "Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the "Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition D
When driving on roads with limited road structures (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the "Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction" message.
Action to take
When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.
Condition E
When the ICC system is not operating properly, a chime sounds and the ICC system warning light (orange) will come on.

Starting and driving 5-69

NOTE:
If the ICC system is temporarily unavailable, the conventional cruise control mode may still be used. For additional information, please see "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" (P. 5-72)

LSD3554
Action to take If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and set the ICC system again. If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
5-70 Starting and driving

LSD3513
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor for the ICC system O1 is located
on the front of the vehicle.
To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: · Always keep the sensor area clean. · Do not strike or damage the areas around
the sensor. · Do not attach a sticker (including trans-
parent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.

· Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
· Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada
Model: ARS4B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-71

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE
This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING
· In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.
· Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.
· Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.
· Do not use the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode when driving under the following conditions:
When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed
In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed

On winding or hilly roads
On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
In very windy areas
· Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

LSD3555
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switches
1. CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed
2. RES+ switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally
3. ICC switch: Master switch to activate the system
4. SET- switch: Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally

5-72 Starting and driving

· Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system
2. Set vehicle speed indicator: This indicator indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.

LSD3106
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators
The display is located in the vehicle information display.
1. Cruise indicator: This indicator indicates the condition of the ICC system depending on a color.
· Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ICC switch is on
· Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set

LSD3556
Operating conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the ICC
switch OA for longer than about 1.5 seconds.
When pushing ICC switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
display and indicators OB are displayed in
the vehicle information display. After you hold ICC switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns off. The cruise indicator appears. You can
Starting and driving 5-73

now set your desired cruising speed. Pushing the ICC switch again will turn the system completely off. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off.
To use the ICC system again, quickly push and release the ICC switch (vehicle-to vehicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.
CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ICC switch off when not using the ICC system.

LSD3557
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET-
OC switch and release it. (The color of the
cruise indicator changes to green and set vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
· To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

· The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.
To cancel the preset speed, use any of the following methods:
1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
3. Turn the ICC switch off. Both the cruise indicator and vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch.
2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, release the switch.
3. Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

5-74 Starting and driving

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it.
2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.
3. Push, then quickly release the SET- switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

System temporarily unavailable

LSD3558
Starting and driving 5-75

REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB)

A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled:
· When the vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed
· When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or manual shift mode
· When the parking brake is applied
· When the VDC operates (including the traction control system)
· When a wheel slips
When the system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the color of the cruise indicator will change to orange.
Action to take
If the color of the cruise indicator changes to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and then perform the setting again.
If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
5-76 Starting and driving

LSD3516
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death. · The RAB system is a supplemental
aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for proper driving procedures. Always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move before and while backing

up. Never rely solely on the RAB system. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
· There is a limitation to the RAB system capability. The RAB system is not effective in all situations.
· Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
The RAB system can assist the driver when the vehicle is backing up and approaching objects directly behind the vehicle.
The RAB system detects obstacles behind
the vehicle using the parking sensors O1
located on the rear bumper.
NOTE:
You can temporarily cancel the sonar function in the vehicle, but the RAB system will continue to operate. For additional information, see "Rear Sonar System (RSS)" (P. 5-122).

Vehicle Information Display
RAB SYSTEM OPERATION

1 RAB system warning light and RAB sys-
tem warning indicator
2 Center display 3 Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
4 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection OFF Switch (if so equipped) When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the RAB system operates. If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is detected when your vehicle is backing up, the RAB system warning indicator will flash in the vehicle information display and the system will chime three times. The system will then automatically apply the brakes. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure.
LSD3992
Starting and driving 5-77

NOTE:
· The brake lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the RAB system.
· When the brakes operate, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

Trip Computer
5-78 Starting and driving

LSD4100

TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the RAB system on or off.

For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped):

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Rear" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

For vehicles with the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection OFF switch (if so equipped):

1. The RAB system is automatically enabled.

2. Press the AEB with Pedestrian Detection OFF switch for approximately 3 seconds to turn the RAB system OFF or ON.

LSD4639

Starting and driving 5-79

5-80 Starting and driving

LSD4101

When the RAB system is turned off, the RAB system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
The RAB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection OFF switch is integrated into the RAB system. If the RAB system is off by the AEB OFF switch, the AEB system will also be off.
RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the RAB system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death. · When the vehicle approaches an
obstacle while the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed, the function may not operate or the start of operation may be delayed. The RAB system may not operate or may not perform sufficiently due to vehicle conditions, driving conditions, the traffic environment, the weather, road surface conditions, etc. Do not

wait for the system to operate. Operate the brake pedal by yourself as soon as necessary.
· If it is necessary to override RAB operation, strongly press the accelerator pedal.
· Always check your surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before and while backing up. The RAB system detects stationary objects behind the vehicle. The RAB system does not detect the following objects:
Moving objects
Low objects
Narrow objects
Wedge-shaped objects
Objects close to the bumper (less than approximately 1 ft [30 cm])
Objects that suddenly appear
Thin objects such as rope, wire, chain, etc.
· The RAB system may not operate for the following obstacles:
Obstacles located high off the ground
Obstacles in a position offset from your vehicle

Obstacles, such as spongy materials or snow, that have soft outer surfaces and can easily absorb a sound wave
· The RAB system may not operate in the following conditions:
There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc., attached to the sonar sensors.
A loud sound is heard in the area around the vehicle.
The surface of the obstacle is diagonal to the rear of the vehicle.
· The RAB system may unintentionally operate in the following conditions:
There is overgrown grass in the area around the vehicle.
There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll gate equipment, a narrow tunnel, a parking lot gate) near the side of the vehicle.
There are bumps, protrusions, or manhole covers on the road surface.
The vehicle drives through a draped flag or a curtain.
There is an accumulation of snow or ice behind the vehicle.

An ultrasonic wave source, such as another vehicle's sonar, is near the vehicle.
· Once the automatic brake control operates, it does not operate again if the vehicle approaches the same obstacle.
· The automatic brake control can only operate for a short period of time. Therefore, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
· In the following situations, the RAB system may not operate properly or may not function sufficiently:
The vehicle is driven in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
The vehicle is driven on a steep hill.
The vehicle's posture is changed (e.g., when driving over a bump).
The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.
The vehicle is turned sharply by turning the steering wheel fully.
Snow chains are used.
Wheels or tires other than NISSAN recommended are used.

Starting and driving 5-81

The brakes are cold at low ambient temperatures or immediately after driving has started.
The braking force becomes poor due to wet brakes after driving through a puddle or washing the vehicle.
· Turn the RAB system off in the following conditions to prevent the occurrence of an unexpected accident resulting from sudden system operation:
The vehicle is towed.
The vehicle is carried on a flatbed truck.
The vehicle is on the chassis dynamometer.
The vehicle drives on an uneven road surface.
Suspension parts other than those designated as Genuine NISSAN parts are used. (If the vehicle height or the vehicle body inclination is changed, the system may not detect an obstacle correctly.)
If the vehicle is using an accessory like a bike rack, or cargo carrier that blocks the sensors.

· Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, an open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, and the RAB system warning light will illuminate, and the "System fault" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light illuminates, park the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the RAB system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
If the RAB system cannot be operated temporarily, the RAB system warning light blinks.

LSD3516
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Observe the following items to ensure proper operation of the system:
· Always keep the parking sensors O1 clean.
· If the parking sensors are dirty, wipe them off with a soft cloth while being careful to not damage them.

5-82 Starting and driving

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION

· Do not subject the area around the park-
ing sensors O1 to strong impact. Also, do
not remove or disassemble the parking sensors. If the parking sensors and peripheral areas are deformed in an accident, etc., have the sensors checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Do not install any stickers (including transparent stickers) or accessories on
the parking sensors O1 and their sur-
rounding areas. This may cause a malfunction or improper operation.

LSD3524
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system could result in serious injury or death.
· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver's attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.

· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane or with a pedestrian ahead in the traveling lane.
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a radar sensor located on the front of
the vehicle OB to measure the distance to
the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a camera installed
behind the windshield OA in addition to the
radar sensor.

Starting and driving 5-83

Vehicle Information Display
AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION
5-84 Starting and driving

LSD3996

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so equipped)
2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator (if so equipped)
3. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light
The AEB system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection function, the system operates at speeds between 6 37 mph (10 60 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection indicator (yellow) in the vehicle information display (if so equipped) and providing an audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force.

Trip Computer

LSD3997

If the driver does not take action, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system issues the second visual (flashing) (red and white) in the vehicle information display (if so equipped) and an audible warning. If the driver releases the accelerator pedal, then the system applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system applies harder braking automatically.
While the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating, you may hear the sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating properly.
NOTE:
The vehicle's brake lights come on when any braking is performed by the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences if a collision should be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will function later or will not function.
Starting and driving 5-85

The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:
· When the steering wheel is turned to avoid a collision.
· When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
· When there is no longer a vehicle or a pedestrian detected ahead.
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.

5-86 Starting and driving

TURNING THE AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM ON/OFF

LSD4639

LSD4101

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system.

For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped):

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Front" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

For vehicles with the AEB with Pedestrian Detection OFF switch (if so equipped):

1. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is automatically enabled.

2. Press the AEB with Pedestrian Detection OFF switch for approximately 3 seconds to turn AEB with Pedestrian Detection system OFF or ON.

When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is turned off, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates.

Starting and driving 5-87

NOTE:
· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.
· If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is off by the AEB with Pedestrian Detection OFF switch, the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system will also be off.
· The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB system is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.
AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system cannot detect all vehicles or pedestrians under all conditions.
· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not detect the following: Pedestrians that are small (for example, children), in a sitting position, operating toys/skateboards, on scooters or in wheelchairs, or not in an upright standing or walking position. Animals of any size. Obstacles (for example, cargo or debris) on the roadway or roadside. Oncoming or crossing vehicles. Vehicles where the tires are difficult to see or the shape of the rear of the vehicle is unclear or obstructed. Parked vehicles.
· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has some performance limitations.
If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle's path, the system will not function when the vehicle approaches the stationary vehicle at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).

Pedestrian detection will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below approximately 6 mph (10km/h).
· For pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not issue the first warning.
· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function properly or detect a vehicle or pedestrians ahead in the following conditions: In poor visibility conditions (such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand storms, smoke, and road spray from other vehicles). If dirt, ice, snow, fog or other material is covering the radar sensor area or camera area of windshield. If strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams) enters the front camera or a sudden change in brightness occurs (for example, entering a tunnel or driving in lightning).

5-88 Starting and driving

In dark or dimly lit conditions, such as at night or in tunnels, including cases where your vehicle's headlights are off or dim, or the tail lights of the vehicle ahead are off.
When the direction of the camera is misaligned.
When driving on a steep downhill slope, on roads with sharp curves, and/or bumpy or dirt roads.
If there is interference by other radar sources.
When your vehicle's position or movement is changed quickly or significantly (for example, lane change, turning vehicle, abrupt steering, sudden acceleration or deceleration).
When your vehicle or the vehicle or pedestrian ahead moves quickly or significantly such that the system cannot detect and react in time (for example, pedestrian moving quickly toward the vehicle at close range, vehicle cutting in, changing lanes, making a turn, steering abruptly, sudden acceleration or deceleration).

When the vehicle or pedestrian is offset from the vehicle's forward path.
If the speed difference between the two vehicles is small.
The pedestrian's profile is partially obscured or unidentifiable; for example, due to transporting luggage, pushing a stroller, wearing bulky or very loose-fitting clothing or accessories, or being in a unique posture (such as raising hands).
There is poor contrast of a person to the background, such as having clothing color or pattern which is similar to the background.
For approximately 15 seconds after starting the engine.
If the vehicle ahead has a unique or unusual shape, extremely low or high clearance heights, or unusual cargo loading or is narrow (for example, a motorcycle).
When the vehicle or pedestrian is located near a traffic sign, a reflective area (for example, water on road), or is in a shadow.
When multiple pedestrians are grouped together.

When the view of the pedestrian is obscured by a vehicle or other object.
· The system performance may be degraded in the following conditions: The vehicle is driven on a slippery road. The vehicle is driven on a slope. Excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the cargo area of your vehicle.
· The system is designed to automatically check the sensor's (radar and camera) functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow or stickers, for example. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear sensor areas regularly.
· In some road and traffic conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.
Starting and driving 5-89

· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may operate when a pattern, object, shadow or lights are detected that are similar to the outline of vehicles or pedestrians, or if they are the same size and position as a vehicle or motorcycle's tail lights.
· The system may keep operating when the vehicle ahead is turning right or left.
· The system may operate when your vehicle is approaching and passing a vehicle ahead.
· Depending on the road shape (curved road, entrance and exit of the curve, winding road, lane regulation, under construction, etc.), the system may operate temporarily for the oncoming vehicle in front of your vehicle.
5-90 Starting and driving

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may react to: objects on the roadside (traffic sign, guardrail, pedestrian, motorcycle, vehicle, etc.) pedestrians when driving on the narrow alleys, etc.

LSD4248
pedestrians who temporarily protrude into or approaching the driving lane to avoid the obstacles on the road shoulder
objects above road (low bridge, traffic sign, etc.)
objects on the road surface (railroad track, grate, steel plate, etc.)
objects in the parking garage (beam, pillar, etc.)
pedestrians or motorcycles approaching the travelling lane
vehicles, pedestrians, motorcycles or objects in adjacent lanes or close to the vehicle

oncoming pedestrians objects on the road (such as trees)
· Braking distances increase on slippery surfaces.
· Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

Vehicle Information Display
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

LSD4806

Starting and driving 5-91

Trip Computer
5-92 Starting and driving

LSD3999

Condition A:
In the following conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light blinks and the system will be turned off automatically: · The radar sensor picks up interference
from another radar source. · The camera area of the windshield is
misted or frozen. · Strong light is shining from the front. · The cabin temperature is over approxi-
mately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight. · The camera area of the windshield glass
is continuously covered with dirt, etc.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will resume automatically.
NOTE:
When the inside of the windshield on the camera area is misted or frozen, it will take a period of time to remove it after the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Condition B:
When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the AEB system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the "Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display (if so equipped).
Action to take:
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the "Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction" warning message continues to be displayed in the vehicle information display (if so equipped), have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C
When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the "Un-

available: Front Radar Obstruction" message in the vehicle information display (if so equipped).
Action to take:
When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.
NOTE: If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system stops working, the I-FCW system will also stop working.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, and the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display (if so equipped).
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3524
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The radar sensor is located on the front of
the vehicle OB . The camera is located on the upper side of the windshield OA .
To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: · Always keep the sensor areas of the front
bumper and windshield clean. · Do not strike or damage the areas around
the sensors (e.g., bumper, windshield).

Starting and driving 5-93

· Do not cover or attach stickers, or install any accessory near the sensors. This could block sensor signals and/or cause failure or malfunction.
· Do not attach metallic objects near the radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
· Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's detection capability.
· Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada
Model: ARS4B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé.
Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

5-94 Starting and driving

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (I-FCW)

The I-FCW system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead in the same lane.
The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor OA
located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

LSD3534
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-FCW system could result in serious injury or death. · The I-FCW system can help warn the
driver before a collision occurs but will not avoid a collision. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

Starting and driving 5-95

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so equipped)
2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light

Vehicle Information Display
5-96 Starting and driving

LSD4000

Trip Computer

LSD4104

Starting and driving 5-97

I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION
The I-FCW system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the I-FCW system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator in the vehicle information display (if so equipped), and sounding an audible alert.
5-98 Starting and driving

LSD2263

TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the I-FCW system ON or OFF.

For vehicles equipped with the vehicle information display (if so equipped):

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Front" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

For vehicles equipped with the AEB with Pedestrian Detection OFF switch (if so equipped):

1. The I-FCW system is automatically enabled.

2. Push the AEB with Pedestrian Detection OFF switch once to disable the I-FCW system.

LSD4639

Starting and driving 5-99

5-100 Starting and driving

When the I-FCW system is turned off, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates. NOTE: · The I-FCW system will be automatically
turned on when the engine is restarted. · The I-FCW system is integrated into the
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.
LSD4101

LSD2312
Illustration A
I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Starting and driving 5-101

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
· The I-FCW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.

Illustration B
· The radar sensor does not detect the following objects:
Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway
Oncoming vehicles
Crossing vehicles
· (Illustration A) The I-FCW system does not function when a vehicle ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle.

LSD2265
· The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions: Snow or heavy rain Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor. Interference by other radar sources. Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles.

5-102 Starting and driving

Driving in a tunnel
(Illustration B) When the vehicle ahead is being towed.
(Illustration C) When the distance to the vehicle ahead is too close, the beam of the radar sensor is obstructed.
(Illustration D) When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.
· The system is designed to automatically check the sensor's functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.
· Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-103

Illustration C
5-104 Starting and driving

LSD2266

Illustration D

LSD2313

Starting and driving 5-105

Vehicle Information Display
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
5-106 Starting and driving

Condition A When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is automatically turned off. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the I-FCW system will resume automatically. Condition B When the sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is automatically turned off. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate in the vehicle information display (if so equipped).
LSD4806

Trip Computer

When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light (orange) and display the "Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction" message in the vehicle information display (if so equipped). Action to take If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean the radar cover on the lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system stops working, the I-FCW system will also stop working.
LSD3999
Starting and driving 5-107

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display (if so equipped).
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3534
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor OA is located behind the lower
grille of the front bumper.
To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: · Always keep the sensor area of the front
bumper clean. · Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor.

· Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.
· Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
· Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

5-108 Starting and driving

FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
For Canada
Model: ARS4B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

Starting and driving 5-109

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) (if so equipped)

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-DA system could result in serious injury or death. · The IDA system is only a warning to
inform the driver of a potential lack of driver attention or drowsiness. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. · The IDA system does not detect and provide an alert of the driver's lack of attention or fatigue in every situation. · It is the driver's responsibility to: · stay alert, · drive safely, · keep the vehicle in the traveling
lane, · be in control of the vehicle at all
times, · avoid driving when tired, · avoid distractions (texting, etc.).
5-110 Starting and driving

The IDA system helps alert the driver if the system detects a lack of attention or driving fatigue.
The system monitors driving style and steering behavior over a period of time, and it detects changes from the normal pattern. If the system detects that driver attention is decreasing over a period of time, the system uses audible and visual warnings to suggest that the driver take a break.
LSD3545
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS SYSTEM OPERATION
If the system detects driver fatigue or that driver attention is decreasing, the message "Take a break?" appears in the vehicle information display and a chime sounds when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h). The system continuously monitors driver attention and can provide multiple warnings per trip.
The system resets and starts reassessing driving style and steering behavior when the ignition switch is cycled from ON to OFF and back on.

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the IDA system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display

and press the OK button. Use the

button to select "Driver Assistance." Then

press the OK button.

2. Select "Driver Attention Alert" and press the OK button.

NOTE: The setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

LSD4105

Starting and driving 5-111

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the IDA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. · The I-DA system may not operate
properly and may not provide an alert in the following conditions: Poor road conditions such as an
uneven road surface or pot holes. Strong side wind. If you have adopted a sporty driving
style with higher cornering speeds or higher rates of acceleration. Frequent lane changes or changes to vehicle speed. · The IDA system will not provide an alert in the following conditions: Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph (60 km/h). Short lapses of attention. Instantaneous distractions such as dropping an object.

Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the system warning message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

System malfunction

LSD3563

If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system malfunctions, the system warning message will appear in the vehicle information display and the function will be stopped automatically.

5-112 Starting and driving

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
· Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
· Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
· Avoid quick starts.
· Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake Pedal Application
· Avoid rapid starts and stops.
· Use smooth, gentle accelerator and brake application whenever possible.
· Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed
· Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops.
· Synchronizing your speed with traffic lights allows you to reduce your number of stops.
· Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher Vehicle Speeds
· Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load.

· Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag.
· Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances
· Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic drag.
· Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.
· Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes.
· Select a gear range suitable to road conditions.

Starting and driving 5-113

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

5. Use Cruise Control · Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed. · Cruise control is particularly effective in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route · Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time.
7. Avoid Idling · Shutting off your engine when safe for stops exceeding 3060 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads · Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up
· Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel economy.
· Vehicles typically need no more than 30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving.
· Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
· Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever possible.
· When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system.

· Keep your engine tuned up.
· Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.
· Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
· Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
· Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. For additional information, see "Engine oil and oil filter recommendations" (P. 10-6).

5-114 Starting and driving

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING
· Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

SSD0488
· Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park) or in an appropriate gear for manual transmission (M/T) models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

· Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.
· Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. M/T models:
Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear.
Continuously Variable Transmission models:
Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-115

POWER STEERING

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
· HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB O1 :
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
· HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB O2 :
Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
· HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO CURB
O3 :
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and remove the key.

WARNING
· If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.
· When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The power steering system is designed to provide power assist while driving to operate the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed, the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. When the temperature of the power steering system goes down, the power assist level will return to normal.

Avoid repeating such steering wheel operations that could cause the power steering system to overheat.
You may hear a sound when the steering wheel is operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunction.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering, but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, see "Power steering warning light" (P. 2-21).

5-116 Starting and driving

BRAKE SYSTEM

The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING
· While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.
· If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the brake shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
· The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.

Starting and driving 5-117

· Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.
When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.
When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, see "Tire and Loading Information label" (P. 8-29).
For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-27).
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The Anti-lock Braking System will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.
Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the selftest occurs, you may hear a "clunk" noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illumi-

nates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally but without anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

5-118 Starting and driving

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.
WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions:
· Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non-slipping drive wheel on the same axle.
· Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function).
· Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions: Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input) Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the indicator light in the instrument panel flashes so note the following:
· The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path.
· You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly.
· Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.
For additional information, "Slip indicator light" (P. 2-12) and "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light" (P. 2-22).
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the indicator light comes on in the instru-
ment panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when this indicator light is on.
The VDC OFF switch (if so equipped) is used to turn off the VDC system. The VDC system can also be enabled or disabled in the vehicle information display (if so equipped).

Starting and driving 5-119

The

indicator light, the RAB warning

light, and the AEB with Pedestrian Detec-

tion warning light illuminate to indicate

that the VDC, the RAB, and the AEB with

Pedestrian Detection systems are off.

When the VDC OFF switch (if so equipped)

or the vehicle information display (if so

equipped) is used to turn off the system,

the VDC system still operates to prevent

one drive wheel from slipping by transfer-

ring power to a non-slipping drive wheel.

The

indicator light flashes if this oc-

curs. All other VDC functions are off and the

indicator light will not flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

· The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.

· Do not modify the vehicle's suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deterio-

rated, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly. This could adversely af-

fect vehicle handling performance,

and the

indicator light may flash

or illuminate.

· If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator light may illuminate.

· If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the

indi-

cator light may illuminate.

· When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may flash or illuminate. Do not

drive on these types of roads.

· When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the

indicator light may

flash or illuminate. This is not a mal-

function. Restart the engine after

driving onto a stable surface.

· If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are

used, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may flash or illuminate.

· The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

5-120 Starting and driving

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns, the system optimizes the distribution of force to each of the front and rear wheels depending on the radius of the turn.

WARNING

· The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds

or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed

and be especially careful when driv-

ing and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.

· Do not modify the vehicle's suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deterio-

rated, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly. This could adversely af-

fect vehicle handling performance,

and the

indicator light may flash

or illuminate.

· If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys-

tem may not operate properly and

the

indicator light may

illuminate.

· If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the

indi-

cator light may illuminate.

· When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may flash or illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads.

· When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the

indicator light may

flash or illuminate. This is not a mal-

function. Restart the engine after

driving onto a stable surface.

· If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are

used, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may flash or illuminate.

· The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

Starting and driving 5-121

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS)

WARNING
· Never rely solely on the hill start assist system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
· The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury.
· The hill start assist system may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.
5-122 Starting and driving

When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backward in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator.
The hill start assist system will operate automatically under the following conditions:
· The transmission is shifted to a forward or reverse gear.
· The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake. The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and the hill start assist system will stop operating completely.
The hill start assist system will not operate when the shift lever is placed in the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and level road.

LSD3247
The RSS sounds a tone to inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper.
When the "DISPLAY" key is on, the sonar view will automatically appear in the touchscreen display. An additional view of the sonar status will appear in the vehicle information display for reference.

WARNING
· The RSS is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper parking.
· The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers. Always look around and check that it is safe to do so before parking.
· Read and understand the limitations of the RSS as contained in this section. The colors of the corner sonar indicator and the distance guide lines in the rear view indicate different distances to the object.
· Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
· This function is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.

· The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.
· The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
CAUTION
· Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.

· Keep the sonar sensors (located on the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The system informs with a visual and audible alert of rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor and the distance does not change. The tone will stop when the obstacle gets away from the vehicle.
When the object is detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.
Starting and driving 5-123

LSD3246
When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object, the corner sonar indi-
cator OA appears. When the center of the
vehicle moves close to an object, the cen-
ter sonar indicator OB appears.

LSD2137
The system indicators OA will appear when
the vehicle moves closer to an object.

5-124 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE SONAR SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system:

For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped):

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Parking Aids" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Sonar" and press the OK button.
· Select "Rear Sensor" and press the OK button to turn the sonar system on or off.
· Select "Display" to display the parking sensor in the vehicle information display when the sonar system activates.
· Select "Range" to change the sonar system distance to "Far," "Mid" or "Near."
· Select "Volume" to change the volume to "High," "Med," or "Low."

LSD4001
The system is automatically activated when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Starting and driving 5-125

5-126 Starting and driving

LSD4002

For vehicles with the RSS OFF switch (if so equipped):
1. The RSS is automatically enabled when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the shift lever is in R (Reverse).
2. Push the RSS OFF switch once to disable the RSS. The indicator light on the RSS switch will not illuminate.
The RSS will automatically be turned on when the engine is restarted.
SONAR LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the sonar system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. · Read and understand the limitations
of the sonar system as contained in this section. Inclement weather may affect the function of the sonar system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

· The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
· Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
· The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper or on the ground.
· The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.
· The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
· Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories, or apply anything blocking the sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the system.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
When sonar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

LSD3516
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sonar sensors O1 are located on the
rear bumper. Always keep the area near the sonar sensors clean.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the sonar sensors.

Starting and driving 5-127

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the sonar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the sonar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the sonar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry key fob.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see "Engine cooling system" (P. 8-4).
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. This vehicle is equipped with a sealed maintenance free battery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, see "Changing engine coolant" (P. 8-5).
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.

5-128 Starting and driving

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional information, see "Tire chains" (P. 8-36).
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: · A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-
move ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. · A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. · A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. · Extra washer fluid to refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
· Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or "grip"

under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.
· Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.
· Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.
· Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.
· Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.
· Do not use the cruise control (if so equipped) on slippery roads.
· Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower.
WARNING
· Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.
· Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.
· Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.
Starting and driving 5-129

To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.

PARKING BRAKE
For CVT models
When parking in an area where the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), the parking brake, if applied, may freeze in place and may be difficult to release.
For safe parking, it is recommended that you place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and securely block the wheels.
For 5MT models
When parking in an area where the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), the parking brake, if applied, may freeze in place and may be difficult to release.
For safe parking, it is recommended that you place the shift lever in the 1 (1st) or R (Reverse) position and securely block the wheels.

5-130 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Emergency engine shut off (Push-button ignition models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF (Push-button ignition models only)

LIC0394
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING
· If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.
· Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.
· Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

6-2 In case of emergency

FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning message is displayed in the trip computer, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P. 2-12), and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5)
WARNING
· Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

· If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

· When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
· Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
· Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

In case of emergency 6-3

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse) or the Continuously Variable Transmission into P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING
· Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the Continuously Variable Transmission into P (Park).
· Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.
· Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

LCE2142
A. Blocks B. Flat tire
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

6-4 In case of emergency

Open the trunk. Lift the floorboard O1 .
Remove the bag containing the jacking rod
and wheel nut wrench. O2 To remove the jack O3 , collapse the jack
from the storage location. If necessary, remove the spare tire first to easily access the jack.

LCE2444
Getting the spare tire and tools

SCE0913
To remove the spare tire, loosen the bolt by turning counterclockwise. Once free, remove the bolt. Remove the spare tire.
CAUTION
Do not touch floor metal directly. Doing so could result in any burns.

In case of emergency 6-5

To remove the wheel cover, use the jacking
rod O1 as illustrated. Apply cloth O2 between the wheel and
jacking rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface.

SCE0630
Removing wheel cover (if so equipped)
CAUTION Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury.
6-6 In case of emergency

LCE2235
Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire
WARNING
· Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
· Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.

· Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.
· Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.
· Never use blocks on or under the jack.
· Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials.
· Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.
· Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.

Always refer to the proper illustrations for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

SCE0002
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head between the 2 notches in the front or the rear. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches.
The jack should be used on firm and level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

In case of emergency 6-7

WCE0048
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-27).
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
sequence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD ) until
they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illus-
trated (OA , OB , OC , OD ). Lower the vehicle
completely.
WARNING
· Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.
· Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.
· Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque: 83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for 3 hours or more or driven less than 1 mi (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
After adjusting the tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure, the display of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km). This is because the tire pressurizes as the tire temperature rises. This does not indicate a system malfunction.
5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle.
NOTE:
You may need to remove the wheel cap (if so equipped) to secure the damaged tire using the spare tire clamp.

6-8 In case of emergency

JUMP STARTING

WCE0157
6. Install the jack in its storage area and tighten the jack screw clockwise.
7. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire.
8. Close the trunk.

WARNING
· Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.
· The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, see specific instructions under the heading "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-27).

To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.
WARNING
· If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.
· Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.
· Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
· Keep battery out of the reach of children.
· The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-9

· Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.
· Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
· Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

LCE2223
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or P (Park) (Continuously Variable Transmission). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).
3. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK or OFF position.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the se-
quence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD ).

6-10 In case of emergency

PUSH STARTING

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

CAUTION
· Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (-) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) -- not to the battery.
· Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

CAUTION
· Do not push start this vehicle. The three-way catalyst may be damaged.
· Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) and manual transmission models cannot be push-started or towstarted. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.
· For manual transmission models, never try to start the vehicle by towing it. When the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.
· Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models cannot be pushstarted or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.

If your vehicle is overheating, indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading (if so equipped) a red high temperature warning light (if so equipped), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps.
WARNING
· Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or vehicle fire.
· To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot. When the coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.
· Do not open the hood if steam is coming out
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (Continuously Variable Transmission).
Do not stop the engine.

In case of emergency 6-11

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine). Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.
6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:
WARNING
· Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.
· Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

6-12 In case of emergency

CAUTION
· When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used.
· Always attach safety chains before towing.
For additional information about towing your vehicle behind a Recreational Vehicle (RV), see "Flat towing" (P. 10-19).
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based upon the type of drivetrain. For additional information, refer to the diagrams in this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed.

Two-Wheel Drive models with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

LCE2345
CAUTION
· Never tow Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels.

In case of emergency 6-13

· When towing Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models with the rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism).
6-14 In case of emergency

Two-Wheel Drive models with manual transmission
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the vehicle on the flatbed truck as illustrated.
If you must use a pull behind tow truck put the manual transmission in N (Neutral).
Your vehicle speed should never exceed 60 mph (97 km/h) when towing your vehicle. After towing 500 miles, start and idle the engine with the transmission in N (Neutral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every 500 miles of towing may cause damage to the transmission's internal parts.

LCE2346
CAUTION
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage. · If you have to tow manual transmis-
sion models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies) or four wheels on the ground: Always release the parking brake. Move the transmission shift lever
to the N (Neutral) position

Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances for manual transmission models only: Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h) Distance: Less than 500 miles (805 km)
When towing long distances or speeds in excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission. For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle:
· Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure.
· Tow chains or cables must be attached only to main structural members of the vehicle.

· Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle.
· Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer's instructions.
· Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.
· Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer's instructions for the recovery device.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
· Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. · Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) System.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.
· Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) (Continuously Variable Transmission models) or 1st (Low) and R (Reverse) (manual transmission models).
· Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
· Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) (Continuously Variable Transmission models) or 1st (Low) and R (Reverse) (manual transmission models).
· Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

MEMO
6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 7-4 Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Cleaning interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle as soon as you can:
· After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.
· After driving on coastal roads.
· When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface.
· When dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.

WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
CAUTION
· Do not concentrate water spray directly on the sonar sensors (if so equipped) on the bumper as this will result in damage to the sensors. Do not use pressure washers capable of spraying water over 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) to wash your vehicle. Use of high-pressure washers over 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in damage to or removal of paint or graphics. Avoid using a high-pressure washer closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the vehicle. Always use a wide-angle nozzle only, keep the nozzle moving and do not concentrate the water spray on any one area.

· Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.
· Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
· Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become waterspotted.
· Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.

7-2 Appearance and care

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product.
· Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.
· Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these products.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

WAI0007
GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first.
Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires.
To remove the high-mounted stop light:
1 Push toward rear of vehicle.
2 Lift to remove.

Appearance and care 7-3

The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle.
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:
· Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels.
· Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.
· Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions:
· Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil-based tire dressing.
· Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/ grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).
· Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/ grooves.
· Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

7-4 Appearance and care

CLEANING INTERIOR

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer's recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION
· Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material.
· Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather (if so equipped) surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather's natural finish.
· Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
· Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.
· Do not spill on or make contact with interior surfaces while handling air fresheners, aroma agents, cosmetics, sunscreen, etc. They may cause permanent discoloration, stain, crack, paint peeling, etc. depending on the ingredients. If they contact the interior surface, wipe them off immediately using a soft cloth.
· Do not use chlorine-based cleaning liquid such as chlorine dioxide and hypochlorous acid, which may cause the

paint peeling, corrosion, etc. If it is unavoidable to clean or sterilize interior surfaces, use less than 75% ethanol. Wipe off ethanol completely. If you leave it uncleaned, it may cause paint peeling, discoloration, etc. Since ethanol is flammable, be careful of fire.
· Never use chloride solutions for cleaning aluminum decoratives (if so equipped), damage may occur.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions:
· Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface.
· Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer's instructions before using the air fresheners.

Appearance and care 7-5

LAI2105
FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision, injury or death: · NEVER place a floor mat on top of
another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or backwards. · Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.
7-6 Appearance and care

· Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning hook. For additional information, see "Floor mat installation" (P. 7-6).
· Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
· Periodically check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.
· After cleaning the vehicle interior, check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.
Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of the floor mat positioning hooks for each seating position varies depending on the vehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, follow the installation instructions provided with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, the shift lever in P (Park) position (Continuously Variable Transmission models) or the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position (manual transmission models) and with the parking brake fully applied, position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is properly positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition switch still in the OFF position, the shift lever in the P (Park) position (Continuously Variable Transmission models) or the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position (manual transmission models) and with the parking brake applied, fully apply and release all pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details about installing the floor mats in your vehicle.

CORROSION PROTECTION

LAI2106
Positioning hooks The illustration shows the location of the floor mat positioning hooks.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For additional information, see "Seat belt maintenance" (P. 1-16).

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
· The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
· Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic collisions.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Appearance and care 7-7

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.
Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION
· Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean.
· Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible.
· Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation.

· Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.
CAUTION
· NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
· Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended that you consult a NISSAN dealer.

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Changing engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . 8-22
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.
WARNING
· Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For manual transmission models, move the shift lever to N (Neutral). For CVT models, move the shift lever to P (Park).
· Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.
· If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.
· It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
· Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle.
8-2 Do-it-yourself

· If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.
· Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
· Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery.
· Because the fuel lines on gasoline engine models are under high pressure even when the engine is off, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.
· Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.
CAUTION
· Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.

· Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.
· Never leave the engine or the transmission related component harness connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
· Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
This "Do-it-yourself" section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. For additional information, see "Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information" (P. 10-23).
You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it is recommended that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

1.6L 4 cylinder (HR16DE engine model)
1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
reservoir 5. Fuse/Fusible link box 6. Battery 7. Fuse box 8. Air cleaner 9. Engine oil dipstick 10. Drive belt location
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with an engine cover.

LDI3658

Do-it-yourself 8-3

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.
WARNING
· Never remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. For additional information on precautions, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-11).
· The coolant reservoir is equipped with a pressure type coolant reservoir cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine NISSAN coolant reservoir cap.

CAUTION
· Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
· When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is prediluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer's instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.

8-4 Do-it-yourself

· The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) (or equivalent coolant), including Genuine Nissan Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant (Green) or the use of nondistilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

LDI3221
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant
level is below the MIN level OB , add coolant to the MAX level OA .
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-

ditional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information on the location of the engine coolant reservoir, see "Engine compartment check locations" (P. 8-3).
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.
WARNING
· To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
· Never remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the coolant reservoir.

· Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
· Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

Do-it-yourself 8-5

ENGINE OIL

It is normal to add some engine oil between oil maintenance intervals depending on the severity of operating conditions or depending on the property of the engine oil used. More engine oil is consumed by frequent acceleration/ deceleration especially when the engine rpm is high. Consumption is likely to be higher when the engine is new. If the rate of oil consumption, after driving for 3,000 miles (5,000 km), is more than 0.5 liter per 600 miles (1,000 km), consult a NISSAN dealer.

LDI3222
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

LDI0371
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H
(High) and L (Low) marks OB . This is the
normal operating oil level range. If the oil
level is below the L (Low) mark OA , re-
move the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not
overfill OC .
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

8-6 Do-it-yourself

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
For additional information on engine oil and oil filter change, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15 minutes.
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.
· Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle jack-up points.
· A suitable adapter should be attached to the jack stand saddle.
CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and support points are used to avoid vehicle damage.

O1 Oil filler cap

LDI3434

O2 Oil drain plug

LDI3435

Do-it-yourself 8-7

O3 Oil filter
Engine oil and filter

LDI3437

1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug and oil filter.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.

WARNING
· Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
· Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
· Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage. · The dipstick must be inserted in
place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole when filling the engine with oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.
7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque: 11 to 15 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 N·m)
8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29.4 to 39.2 N·m)
9. Refill the engine with the recommended oil through the oil filler opening, and install the oil filler cap securely.
For additional information about drain and refill capacity, see "Recommended fluids/ lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2). The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine the proper amount of oil in the engine.

8-8 Do-it-yourself

10. Start the engine and check for leakage around the drain plug and the oil filter. Correct as required. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
After the operation
1. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
2. Reset oil and oil filter maintenance reminder (if so equipped). For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-25)
· Dispose of waste oil and filter properly. · Check your local regulations.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if so equipped)
CAUTION
· NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.
· Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty outlined in your Warranty Information Booklet.
· Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may also damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty outlined in your Warranty Information Booklet.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID
For additional information on brake fluid specification, see "Recommended fluids/ lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2).
WARNING
· Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch (if so equipped) systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake and clutch system and affect the vehicle's stopping ability.
· Clean the filler cap before removing. · Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous
and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

LDI3438
BRAKE FLUID
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir.
If the fluid level is below the MIN line OB , or
the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent
DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid up to the MAX line OA . If
fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI3438
CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The brake fluid reservoir is shared with the clutch hydraulic system for manual transmissions. If the level is below the MIN line
OB , or the brake warning light comes on,
add Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid up to the MAX line
OA . If fluid must be added frequently, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

LDI3223
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR
Add a washer solvent to the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid.

8-10 Do-it-yourself

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield-Washer Fluid Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
· Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for windshield-washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.
· Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
· Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

BATTERY

Caution symbols for battery

WARNING

No smoking, No exposed flames, No Sparks

Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

Shield eyes

Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or battery acid.

Keep away from children

Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can

cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your

Battery acid

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the bat-

tery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

Note operating instructions

Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

Explosive gas

Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

8-12 Do-it-yourself

· If the battery is labeled "do not open" it is maintenance free and battery fluid should not be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or a qualified specialist workshop to confirm the battery's performance.
· Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.
· Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.
· If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING
· Do not expose the battery to flames, an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
· When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.
· Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
· Keep battery out of the reach of children.
· Do not tip the battery.

NOTE:

LDI3302

Do not try to open the top of the battery.
This battery is not equipped with removable vent caps.

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see "Jump starting" (P. 6-9). If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do-it-yourself 8-13

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM

DRIVE BELT
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.
The current sensor OA is located near the
battery along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area.

LDI3246
CAUTION
· Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely.
· Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

LDI3028
1. Automatic tensioner pulley 2. Generator pulley 3. Water pump pulley 4. Air conditioner compressor pulley 5. Crankshaft pulley
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

8-14 Do-it-yourself

SPARK PLUGS

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor condition, have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition.

SDI1895
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridium-
tipped OA spark plugs as frequently as con-
ventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.
· Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

AIR CLEANER

LDI3439
WARNING
· Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner filter not only cleans the intake air, it also stops the flame if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner is not installed and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Never drive with the air cleaner filter off. Be cautious working on the engine when the air cleaner is off.

· Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.
To remove the filter from the air cleaner,
release the retaining clips OA and pull the
cover upward.
The viscous paper type filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace the air filter according to the maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.
NOTE: After installing a new air cleaner filter, make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the
clips OA .

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual for change intervals.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

8-16 Do-it-yourself

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

LDI2757
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow the procedure below:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
2. Push the release tab OB . 3. Move the wiper blade OA down and
remove.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
5. Push wiper on to windshield.
CAUTION
· After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.
· Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.

Do-it-yourself 8-17

BRAKES

LDI2731
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle
OD . This may cause clogging or improper
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or
small pin OC .

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.
The front disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-type brakes self-adjust every time the parking brake is applied.
WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the brakes pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

8-18 Do-it-yourself

FUSES

If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment.

LDI2997
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
Fuses are used in the passenger compartment. Spare fuses are provided and can be found in the passenger compartment fuse box.
When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

LDI3527

CAUTION
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

Do-it-yourself 8-19

Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and the fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links in the holder. If any of the fusible links are melted, replace only with Genuine NISSAN parts. For checking and replacing the fusible links, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LDI3232
5. If the fuse is open OA , replace it with a new fuse OB .
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
8-20 Do-it-yourself

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

LDI3087

The fuse box is located on the driver's side of the instrument panel.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Remove the fuse box cover OA with a
suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.

3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller OB .

LDI2998
5. If the fuse is open OC , replace it with an equivalent good fuse OD .
6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.

Do-it-yourself 8-21

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts.

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver OA into the slit OB of the corner and twist it
to separate the upper part from the lower part. Place a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the casing.

8-22 Do-it-yourself

LDI3685
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so equipped)

LDI3686

3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent. · Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction. · Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity. · Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the lower part.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
OC and OD .
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
If you need assistance for replacement, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

FCC Notice:
For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada: This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference. (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

LIGHTS

HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb (if so equipped)
If bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
· Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed.

· Only touch the base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance.
· High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.
· Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lenses of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Replacing the LED headlight bulb (if so equipped)
If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
Replacing the fog light bulb
If fog light bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
· High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.
· When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope.
· Use the same number and wattage as originally installed as shown in the chart.
· Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light.

8-24 Do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)* High Low Turn/Position Side marker
Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)* High/Low Position/Daytime running light (if so equipped) Turn/Position Side marker
Fog light (Type A) (if so equipped)* Fog light assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*
Fog Daytime running light Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* Map light* Room light* Trunk light High-mounted stop light* Rear combination light* Turn Stop/Tail Side marker Backup (reversing) light assembly* Tail Backup (reversing) License plate light*

Wattage (W)
65 55 28/8 5
-- -- 28/8 5 35
35 21 -- 10 8 3.4 --
21 21/5
5
5 16 5

Bulb No.
H9 H11 7442NA W5W
-- -- 7442NA W5W H8
H8 W21W
-- W10W
-- 158 --
WY21W W21/5W
W5W
W5W W16W
--

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information. * It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
Do-it-yourself 8-25

6. High-mounted stop light 7. Rear combination light 8. Backup (reversing) light assembly 9. Trunk light 10. License plate light

1. Headlight assembly 2. Map light 3. Room light
8-26 Do-it-yourself

LDI3441
4. Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)
5. Fog light/Fog light assembly (if so equipped)

SDI1805
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal Indicates bulb installation

Trunk light

WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, see "Flat tire" (P. 6-3).
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
WARNING

LDI2135

Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Do-it-yourself 8-27

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).
For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-18), "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5), and "Flat tire" (P. 6-3).
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the "Cold Tire Pressure" heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar.

Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:
· Most tires naturally lose air over time.
· Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. For additional information, see "TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert" (P. 5-8).
Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING
· Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident.
· The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.

8-28 Do-it-yourself

· Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.
· For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Tire and Loading Information label
1 Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.
2 Vehicle load limit: For additional
information, see "Vehicle loading information" (P. 10-15).
3 Tire size: See "Tire labeling" (P. 8-31).

LDI2007
4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires
to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle's GVWR.

Do-it-yourself 8-29

5 Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.
6 Spare tire size.

LDI0393
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.

8-30 Do-it-yourself

Size
Front and Rear Original Tires: 195/65R15 Front and Rear Original Tires: 205/55R16 Front and Rear Original Tires: 205/50R17 Spare Tire: T125/ 70D15

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

kPa

PSI

230

420

Example

WDI0394

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the Tire Identification Number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire's load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

WDI0395

Example

O1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H) 3. Two-digit number (65): This num-

1. P: The "P" indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all tires have this information).

ber, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire's ratio of height to width.

2. Three-digit number (215): This 4. R: The "R" stands for radial.

number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

8-32 Do-it-yourself

LDI2786

Example (Type A) (if so equipped)
O2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) 3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

XXXX)

(Optional).

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the "Department Of Transportation". The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number.

5. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing then

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer's

look on the other sidewall of the

identification mark.

tire.

Do-it-yourself 8-33

LDI3639

Example (Type B) (if so equipped)
O2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) 2. Three-digit code: Manufacturer's

for a new tire (example: DOT XXX

identification mark.

XXXXXX XXXX)

3. Six-digit code: Descriptive code

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart-

used to identify significant char-

ment Of Transportation". The

acteristics of the tire.

symbol can be placed above, below or to the left of the Tire Identification Number.

4. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103

means the 31st week of 2003.

O3 Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester and others.
O4 Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
O5 Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

8-34 Do-it-yourself

O6 Term of "tubeless" or "tube type"
Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube ("tube type") or not ("tubeless").
O7 The word "radial"
The word "radial" is shown if the tire has radial structure.
O8 Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an

asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
· When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.
· Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
· Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the low tire pressure warning system.

· Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system to malfunction resulting in personal injury or death, excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission and differential gears.
· For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating "M&S" on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's suggestions. Use only SAE class "S" chains. Class "S" chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class "S" chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tires. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire

chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.
NOTE:
Tire chains are not permitted for use with 17 in wheels.

8-36 Do-it-yourself

Wheel nut tightening torque: 83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

WDI0258
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
For additional information on tire replacing procedures, see "Flat tire" (P. 6-3).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

· After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.
· Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
· Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
· For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Tire wear and damage 1. Wear indicator 2. Location mark

WDI0259

Do-it-yourself 8-37

WARNING
· Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.
· The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.
· Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.

· Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 10-9).

WARNING
· The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.
· If your vehicle was originally equipped with four tires that were the same size and you are only replacing two of the four tires, install the new tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.

8-38 Do-it-yourself

· If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs/ drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. For additional information on wheel off-set dimensions, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 10-9).
· When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

· The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is not handled correctly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor.
· When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID registration may be required. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for ID registration.
· Do not use a valve stem cap that is not specified by NISSAN. The valve stem cap may become stuck.
· Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be clogged up with dirt and cause a malfunction or loss of pressure.
· Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.
· The use of retread tires is not recommended.
· For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.
· For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

Care of wheels
· Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
· Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.
· Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.
· Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
· NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire)
When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function.
Observe the following precautions if the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident:

WARNING
· The spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.
· Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving.
· Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).
· With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
· When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels).
· Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear.

8-40 Do-it-yourself

· Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles.
· Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time.
· Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
CAUTION
· Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.
· Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught.

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5 Emission control system maintenance: . . . . . . 9-6 Chassis and body maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 1.6L 4 cylinder (HR16DE engine model) . . . . . . . . 9-8

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical condition, as well as its emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section are required to be serviced at regular intervals. However under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and training programs. They are fully qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is recommended that you ask your NISSAN dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified Collision Center is located, or go to http://collision.nissanusa.com.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer's service department can perform the service needed to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have it checked promptly. In addition, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the "Maintenance precautions" (P. 8-2).
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
WARNING
Failure to follow the procedures listed within this section may result in personal injury.
Additional information on the following items with " * " is found in the "Do-ityourself " section of this manual.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Check that the gas stays or struts properly and securely hold the hood, trunk, or rear hatch fully open. If the hood, trunk, or rear hatch is not held open, have the gas stays or struts replaced.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Rotate tires at the specified interval shown in the maintenance schedule.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tire pressure sensor: It is recommended that you replace the tire pressure sensor assembly when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. It is recom-

mended that you have a damaged windshield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or a NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate a collision center in your area, refer to http://collision.nissanusa.com.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) P (Park) position mechanism (if so equipped): On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints/headrests move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: This vehicle is equipped with a sealed maintenance free battery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid level*: Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, see "Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)" (P. 5-4).
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel

lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. For additional information, see "Cleaning exterior" (P. 7-2).
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to give you a better understanding of the scheduled maintenance items that should be regularly checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item requires service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance, your vehicle requires that some items be checked during normal day-to-day operation. For additional information, see "General maintenance" (P. 9-2).
Items marked with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are not required to perform maintenance on these items in order to maintain the warranties which come with your NISSAN. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
When applicable, additional information can be found in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of non-OEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a NISSAN product. Many of the aftermarket flushing systems use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, grease, and refrigerant, see "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2).
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE:
Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or cracking and for proper tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter more frequently.
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. For

additional information on the proper mixture for your area, see "Engine cooling system" (P. 8-4).
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval of the coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscosity see "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2).
Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs of the type as originally equipped.
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE:
Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings: Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, inspect more frequently.
Tire rotation: Rotate tires at the specified interval shown in the maintenance schedule. When rotating tires, check for damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified intervals.
If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect the fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than 210,000, replace the CVT fluid.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions:
· Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).
· Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
· Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go "rush hour" traffic.
· Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

· Driving in dusty conditions.
· Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads.
· Using a car-top carrier.
If your vehicle is mainly operated under the severe conditions, follow the severe use maintenance intervals shown in the maintenance schedule.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

1.6L 4 CYLINDER (HR16DE engine model)
The following shows the maintenance schedule.
Choose the maintenance schedule needed based on your vehicle driving conditions.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.

5,000 miles/(8,000 km)/6 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter

7,500 miles/(12,000 km)/6 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

10,000 miles/(16,000 km)/ 12 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance: Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid

15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/ 12 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Drive shaft boots · CVT fluid · Manual transmission gear oil · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace in-cabin microfilter · Tire rotation

Severe use maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Maintenance and schedules 9-9

15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/ 18 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter

20,000 miles/(32,000 km)/ 24 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Replace manual transmission gear oil

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

22,500 miles/(36,000 km)/ 18 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Intelligent key battery · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

25,000 miles/(40,000 km)/ 30 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter

30,000 miles/(48,000 km)/ 24 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance: Inspections: · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Fuel tank vapor vent system* · Fuel lines/connections* · Exhaust system · Steering gear and linkage · Axle and suspension parts · Drive shaft boots · CVT fluid · Manual transmission gear oil · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Maintenance and schedules 9-11

Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace Engine air filter (1) · Replace brake fluid · Replace in-cabin microfilter · Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

30,000 miles/(48,000 km)/ 36 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

35,000 miles/(56,000 km)/ 42 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter

37,500 miles/(60,000 km)/ 30 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

40,000 miles/(64,000 km)/ 48 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Replace manual transmission gear oil

45,000 miles/(72,000 km)/ 36 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Drive shaft boots · CVT fluid · Manual transmission gear oil · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace in-cabin microfilter · Replace Intelligent Key battery · Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

45,000 miles/(72,000 km)/ 54 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter

50,000 miles/(80,000 km)/ 60 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

52,500 miles/(84,000 km)/ 42 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

55,000 miles/(88,000 km)/ 66 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter

60,000 miles/(96,000 km)/ 48 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Engine drive belts* · Fuel tank vapor vent system* · Fuel lines/connections* · Exhaust system · Axle and suspension parts · Steering gear and linkage · Drive shaft boots · CVT fluid · Manual transmission gear oil · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

· Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine air filter (1) · Replace brake fluid · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace in-cabin microfilter · Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

60,000 miles/(96,000 km)/ 72 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Replace CVT fluid · Replace manual transmission gear oil

Maintenance and schedules 9-17

65,000 miles/(104,000 km)/ 78 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter

67,500 miles/(108,000 km)/ 54 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace Intelligent Key battery · Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

70,000 miles/(112,000 km)/ 84 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

9-18 Maintenance and schedules

Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid

75,000 miles/(120,000 km)/ 60 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Engine drive belt* · CVT fluid · Drive shaft boots · Manual transmission gear oil · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace in-cabin microfilter · Tire rotation

Severe use maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval * Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-19

75,000 miles/(120,000 km)/ 90 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter

80,000 miles/(128,000 km)/ 96 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Replace manual transmission gear oil

9-20 Maintenance and schedules

82,500 miles/(132,000 km)/ 66 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

85,000 miles/(136,000 km)/ 102 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter

90,000 miles/(144,000 km)/ 72 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Engine drive belts* · Fuel tank vapor vent system* · Fuel lines/connections* · Exhaust system · Steering gear and linkage · Axle and suspension parts · Drive shaft boots · CVT fluid · Manual transmission gear oil · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)

Maintenance and schedules 9-21

· Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine air filter (1) · Replace brake fluid · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace in-cabin microfilter · Replace Intelligent Key battery · Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

90,000 miles/(144,000 km)/ 108 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid

9-22 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 miles/(152,000 km)/ 114 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter

97,500 miles/(156,000 km)/ 78 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

100,000 miles/(160,000 km)/ 120 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-23

Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Replace manual transmission gear oil

105,000 miles/(168,000 km)/ 84 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Engine drive belts* · Drive shaft boots · CVT fluid · Manual transmission gear oil · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essential: · Replace engine coolant * (1) · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace in-cabin microfilter · Replace spark plugs · Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
(1) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months.
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-24 Maintenance and schedules

105,000 miles/(168,000 km)/ 126 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter

110,000 miles/(176,000 km)/ 132 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid

Maintenance and schedules 9-25

112,500 miles/(180,000 km)/ 90 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace Intelligent Key battery · Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

115,000 miles/(184,000 km)/ 138 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Exhaust system · Drive shaft boots · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential: · Replace engine oil & filter

120,000 miles/(192,000 km)/ 96 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Engine drive belts* · Fuel tank vapor vent system* · Fuel lines/connections* · Exhaust system · Steering gear and linkage · Axle and suspension parts · Drive shaft boots · CVT fluid · Manual transmission gear oil · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)

9-26 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-27

MEMO
9-28 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . 10-12

Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the "Do-it-yourself" section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid Type

Fuel

Engine oil*1 Drain and refill 1*: For additional information, see "Engine oil" (P. 8-6)

With oil filter change
Without oil filter change

Engine coolant with reservoir

With manual transmission (M/T)
With Continuously Variable Transmis-
sion (CVT)

Manual transmission (M/T) gear oil (if so equipped)

Capacity (approximate)

Metric Measure

US Measure

Imperial Measure

41 L

10-7/8 gal

9 gal

4.1 L

4-3/8 qt

3-5/8 qt

3.8 L 5.8 L 6.95 L

4 qt 1-1/2 gal 1-7/8 gal

3-3/8 qt 1-1/4 gal 1-1/2 gal

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
· For additional information, see "Fuel recommendation" (P. 10-4). · Genuine "NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SP" (or equivalent) is recommended. · If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic 0W-20 GF-6 SP motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, see "Engine oil and oil filter recommendations" (P. 10-6).
· Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
· Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, or equivalent. · If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid HQ-Multi is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid HQ-Multi as soon as it is available.

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid Type
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid (if so equipped)
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid Multi-purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system oil Windshield-washer fluid

Capacity (approximate)

Metric Measure

US Measure

Imperial Measure

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

For additional information, see "Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid" (P. 8-9).

· Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 · NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty outlined in your Warranty information Booklet.

Refill to the proper level according to the · Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid, available in

instructions in the "Brake and clutch (if so mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer, or equivalent DOT 3 or

equipped) fluid" (P. 8-9).

DOT 4.

· NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

· HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)

· For additional information, see "Air conditioner system

refrigerant and oil recommendations" (P. 10-7).

· Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG (YR20 oil) or

equivalent · For additional information, see "Air conditioner system

refrigerant and oil recommendations" (P. 10-7).

4.2 L

1-1/8 gal

7/8 gal

· Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
· Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.
· Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.
· Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.
· Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

· Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
· U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.
· The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.
· If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%)

· E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle and should not be used. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
· If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

E15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
E85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note that

while some fuel pumps label MMT content, not all do, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy "spark knock." ("Spark knock" is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. For additional information, see "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2). NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.

LTI2587
Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in "Change intervals."

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes:
· repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures
· driving in dusty conditions
· extensive idling
· stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and NISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG (YR20 oil) or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.
The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth's ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth's atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. Air conditioner system should only be serviced by trained and

Technical and consumer information 10-7

certified technicians to ensure proper and safe operation (SAE J2845). A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant. Only new and SAEJ2842 certified evaporator(s) shall be used as replacement parts. A damaged or leaking air conditioning evaporator shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. To replace a damaged or leaking evaporator, use only new and SAE J2842 certified evaporator(s). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system.
10-8 Technical and consumer information

SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order Idle speed M/T in N (Neutral) position CVT in N (Neutral) position Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle Spark plug Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation

Metric measure US measure Metric measure US measure
Metric measure US measure

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

1.6L 4 cylinder (HR16DE engine model) Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC 4-cylinder, inline 78.0 mm x 83.6 mm 3.071 in x 3.291 in 1,598 cm3 97.51 cu in 1342
No adjustment is necessary.
DILKAR6K-11 1.1 mm 0.043 in Timing chain

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type

Offset Metric Measure

Steel

47 mm

Aluminum

50 mm

Aluminum

55 mm

T-type (Steel spare)

30 mm

Tire Size

All Season

Spare tire

Temporary spare

Offset US Measure 1.85 in 1.97 in 2.17 in
1.18 in

Size
15 x 6.5J 16 x 6.0J 17 x 6.5J 15 x 4T
195/65R15 205/55R16 205/50R17
T125/70D15

10-10 Technical and consumer information

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Body Type

Sedan

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

U.S.A

15 and 16 inch wheel

17 inch wheel

Canada 15 inch wheel

16 inch wheel

17 inch wheel

Track width

Front

15 inch wheel

16 inch wheel

17 inch wheel

Rear

15 inch wheel

16 inch wheel

17 inch wheel

Wheelbase

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross axle weight rating

Front

Rear

Metric Measure

US Measure

4,495 mm 1,740 mm

177 in 68.5 in

1,460.3 mm

57.5 in

1,465.3 mm 1,454.3 mm 1,461.2 mm 1,466.3 mm

57.7 in 57.3 in 57.5 in 57.7 in

1,520 mm

59.8 in

1,515 mm

59.6 in

1,505 mm

59.3 in

1,530 mm

60.2 in

1,525 mm

60.0 in

1,515 mm

59.6 in

2,620 mm

103.1 in

For additional information, refer to the "F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label" on the center pillar between the driver's
side front and rear doors.

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

LTI2449
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

LTI2451
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number)
The vehicle identification number is located as shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-11

LTI2260
1.6L 4 cylinder (HR16DE engine model)
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

STI0349
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

LTI2447
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.

10-12 Technical and consumer information

LTI2251
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The label is located as shown.

LTI2448
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-13

Symbol Name Caution

Reference ISO 7000 0434

Graphic

Air Conditioning System (MAC)

ISO 2575 D01

MAC System Lubricant Type (PAGPOE)

Requires Registered Technician to Service MAC System

Flammable Refrigerant Air Conditioner Specification Label Symbols

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
LTI2695
To mount the front license plate, attach the license plate bracket to the bumper fascia at the location marks (small dimples) using
the two provided screws OA .

10-14 Technical and consumer information

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING
· It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle: · Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment,

fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.
· GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.
· GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, cargo, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
· GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
· GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

· Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label.
· Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.

Technical and consumer information 10-15

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. For additional information, see "Measurement of weights" (P. 10-18).
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as "The combined weight of occupants and cargo" on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as "Seating Capacity" on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get "the combined weight of occupants and cargo", add the weight of all occupants, then add the total cargo weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.

Example
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

10-16 Technical and consumer information

LTI2335

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Towing a trailer with a vehicle that is not intended for towing may result in an accident involving injury or death.
WARNING
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. Towing a trailer may result in an accident involving injury or death.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. For additional information, see "Measurement of weights" (P. 10-18).
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, see "Tire and Loading Information label" (P. 8-29).
LOADING TIPS · The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./ C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
· Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

Technical and consumer information 10-17

WARNING
· Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
· Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.

· Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle's warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.

10-18 Technical and consumer information

TOWING A TRAILER

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
· Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
· Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
· Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle with the front tires on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
· DO NOT tow any continuously variable transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.
· For emergency towing procedures see "Towing recommended by NISSAN" (P. 6-13).

Manual Transmission (if so equipped)
· Always tow with the manual transmission in N (Neutral).
· After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and idle the engine with the transmission in N (Neutral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing may cause damage to internal transmission parts.
Continuously Variable Transmission (if so equipped)
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Technical and consumer information 10-19

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a

level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
· Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
· Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

10-20 Technical and consumer information

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.

20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada's Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm (English speakers) or http://www.tc.gc.ca/ fra/securiteautomobile/menu.htm (French speakers)
Or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Investigations Laboratory 80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z0A1
Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada's Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/ securiteroutiere (French speakers).

Technical and consumer information 10-21

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800387-0122.

Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the "ready condition" for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the "ready condition" when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a "not ready" condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle's inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is "not ready". If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is "ready". It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to set the "ready condition" or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
· How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
· Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
· How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
· How fast the vehicle was traveling.
· Sounds are not recorded.

10-22 Technical and consumer information

OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals can also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner's Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

Technical and consumer information 10-23

MEMO
10-24 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41 Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48 Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61 Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-17 Air bag warning light, supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-17 Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation. . . . .4-19, 4-25 Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . .4-27 Air conditioner specification label . .10-13 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Air conditioner system refrigerant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Heater and air conditioner . . . . . . .4-24 Heater and air conditioner controls. .4-25 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . .4-27 Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20 Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42 Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-24 Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-47 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . .5-117 Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-128 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27

AM radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28 AM/FM radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32, 4-34 Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-35 Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42 FM radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28 iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39 iPod® player operation . . . . . . . . .4-39 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 Steering wheel audio control switch .4-45 USB Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37 USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36 Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46 Automatic Automatic power window switch . . .2-69 Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . .2-18, 5-83
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-128, 8-12 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .8-22
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-16 Belt (See drive belt). . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Blind Spot Warning (BSW). . . . . . . . . .5-33

Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42 Bluetooth® hands-free phone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
Bluetooth® connections . . . . . . . .4-63 Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . .4-55 Phone indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54 Text messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60 Voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37 Brake Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-117 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-25 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Brake wear indicators. . . . . . .2-24, 8-18 Parking brake operation. . . . . . . . .5-25 Self-adjusting brakes. . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-119 Brake fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-113 Brightness control Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-7 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-14 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

C
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15 Check tire press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Check tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 Child restraints . . . . . . . .1-17, 1-18, 1-19, 1-21
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26, 1-32, 1-37 Top tether strap anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-5 Clock set/adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Clutch Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-128 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11, 5-19 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11, 5-19 Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . .4-7 Controls Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . .4-45 Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-25
11-2

Heater and air conditioner controls (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24 Heater and air conditioner controls (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
D
Daytime Running Light System . . . . . .2-50 Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44, 4-18, 4-26 Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-44 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-50 Display controls (see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 3-5 Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Driving Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . .5-128 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11, 5-19 Driving with manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12, 5-23

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
E
Eco Drive Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-114 Emergency call (SOS) button . . . . . . . .2-56 Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . . . .5-16 Emission control information label . . . .10-12 Emission control system warranty . . . .10-20 Engine
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-16 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5 Changing engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-7 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 Engine cooling system. . . . . . . . . . .8-4 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-15 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-12 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-17, 5-18 Engine Block Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-129

Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . .5-4 Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .2-63
F
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-12 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4 Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-10 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Front-door pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-114

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-25 Fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . .5-113 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
G
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Gauge
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
H
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . .4-50 Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . .2-45 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-45 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24

Heated mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Heated seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Heater
Heater and air conditioner. . . . . . . .4-24 Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-25 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-18, 4-25 Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . .5-122 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
I
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-13
Immobilizer system . . . . . . .2-42, 5-12, 5-16 Important vehicle information label . . .10-12 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . .5-114 Indicator
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-50 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2 Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-50 Intelligent Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . .5-53 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) . . . . .5-110 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-95 Intelligent Key system Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9 Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Mechanical key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-13

11-3

Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . .3-17 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70 Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39 ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
J
Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-13
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-22 Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system (See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Keys NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-7 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
L
Labels Air conditioner specification label . . .10-13 Emission control information label . .10-12 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-12 F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . .10-12 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-11
11-4

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-61 Lane Departure Warning (LDW). . . . . . .5-26 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Launch bar menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 License plate Installing the license plate. . . . . . . .10-14 Light Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-17 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-25 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-14 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-25 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-45 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-45 Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70 Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70 Lock Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . .3-7 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 3-5

Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-25 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . .3-23 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Low fuel warning light . .2-16, 2-18, 2-21, 2-37 Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . .2-18 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
M
Maintenance General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2 Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-16 Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2 Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Malfunction indicator light . . . . . .2-15, 2-20 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3 Map lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70 Menu button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-50 Mirror
Heated mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Mirror defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
N
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-7 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42, 5-12, 5-16 NissanConnect® Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-5 Oil
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-7 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Overheat If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-11 Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-23 Owner's manual/service manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-23

P
Parking Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-25 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-115
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-50 Power
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-116 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-116 Precautions Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2 Precautions on booster seats . .1-26, 1-32,
1-37 Precautions on child restraints . .1-26, 1-32,
1-37 Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . .1-9 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

R
Radio Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-50 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 Steering wheel audio control switch .4-45
Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . .2-22, 5-76 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . .5-43 Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . .2-36, 2-38, 2-61 Rear power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Rear Sonar System (RSS) . . . . . . . . . .5-122 Rear sonar system OFF switch. . . . . . .2-55 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44, 4-18, 4-26 Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . .2-44 Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 RearView Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Recorders
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22 Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . .10-7 Registering a vehicle in another country.10-11 Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-19, 5-18 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-21

11-5

S
Safety Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . .3-7 Child seat belts . . . . .1-19, 1-26, 1-32, 1-37 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . .10-21
Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Rear seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Seat belt Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-18 Injured person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . .1-9 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-16 Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9, 7-7 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-15 Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-13
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16 Seat belt warning light . . . . . .1-12, 2-16, 2-17 Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64 Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . .2-42, 5-12, 5-16
11-6

Security systems Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-42
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Service manual order form . . . . . . . .10-23 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 Shifting
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-15 Siri® Eyes-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47 Sonar Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-122 Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6 SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61 Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-119 Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 Starting Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-16 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-13 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-17, 5-18 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-17, 5-18 Starting the engine (models with NISSAN Intelligent Key® system) . . . . . . . .5-17, 5-18 Steering Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-116 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-45

Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64 Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Sun visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-61 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-17 Supplemental front impact air bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48 Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . . .1-61 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41 Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-41 Switch Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46 Automatic power window switch . . .2-69 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-45 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-45 Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-50 Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Rear sonar system OFF switch . . . . .2-55 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . .2-44, 4-18, 4-26 Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-44 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42, 5-12, 5-16 Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 8-40 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35 Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . .10-19 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-27, 10-10 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 5-5 Towing 2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19 Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19 Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11, 5-19 Driving with manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12, 5-23

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6 Trunk access through the rear seat . . . .3-24 Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . .3-23 Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-19 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models without Navigation System) . . .4-36 USB/iPod® Charging Ports . . . . . . . . .2-58
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-14 Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .10-10 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .5-119 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) (Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle immobilizer system . .2-42, 5-12, 5-16 Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . .2-25 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-15 Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15

Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-42 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42, 5-12, 5-16 Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Voice Prompt Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . .4-53
W
Warning Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-17 Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-14 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Door open warning light . . . . . . . . .2-15 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-15 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2 Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16, 2-18, 2-21, 2-37 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Seat belt warning light . . . .1-12, 2-16, 2-17 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-17 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-42 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-61
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-9, 2-12 Warning systems switch . . . . . . .2-53, 2-54 Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
11-7

Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27, 10-10 When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-68 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Wiper Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-43 Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
11-8

MEMO

GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
· Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.
· Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.
· Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.
· Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not specifically designed for a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol can

adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
· Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
· U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
For additional information, see "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2).

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
See "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2).
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label.
The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver's door. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-27).
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, see "Break-in schedule" (P. 5-113). Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

To view the digital NissanConnect manual, go to www.nissanquickguide.com/#/guide/2023/versa/browse
or snap this QR code with an appropriate QR code reader.

Printing : July 2022 Publication No.: OM23EM 0N18U0
Printed in the U.S.A.

`22 N18-D

Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)